Add MIPS r3 and r5 support.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
403 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
404 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
405 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}]
406 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
407 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
408 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
409 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
410 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
411 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
412 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
413 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
414 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
415 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
416 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
417 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
418 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
419 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
420 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
421 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
422 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
423 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
424 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
425 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
426 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
427 @end ifset
428 @ifset MMIX
429
430 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
431 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
432 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
433 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
434 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset NIOSII
437
438 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
439 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
440 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
441 @end ifset
442 @ifset NDS32
443
444 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
445 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
446 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
447 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
448 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
449 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
450 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
451 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
452 [@b{-mb2bb}]
453 @end ifset
454 @ifset PDP11
455
456 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
457 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
458 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
459 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
460 @end ifset
461 @ifset PJ
462
463 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
464 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
465 @end ifset
466 @ifset PPC
467
468 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
469 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
470 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
471 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
472 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
473 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
474 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
475 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
476 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
477 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
478 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
479 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
480 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
481 @end ifset
482 @ifset RX
483
484 @emph{Target RX options:}
485 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
486 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
487 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
488 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
489 [@b{-mpid}]
490 [@b{-mrelax}]
491 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
492 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
493 @end ifset
494 @ifset S390
495
496 @emph{Target s390 options:}
497 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
498 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
499 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
500 @end ifset
501 @ifset SCORE
502
503 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
504 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
505 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
506 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
507 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset SPARC
510
511 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
512 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
513 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
514 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
515 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
516 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
517 @end ifset
518 @ifset TIC54X
519
520 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
521 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
522 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
523 @end ifset
524
525 @ifset TIC6X
526
527 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
528 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
529 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
530 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset TILEGX
533
534 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
535 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
536 @end ifset
537 @ifset TILEPRO
538 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
539 @end ifset
540
541 @ifset XTENSA
542
543 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
544 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
545 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
546 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
547 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
548 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
549 @end ifset
550
551 @ifset Z80
552
553 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
554 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
555 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
556 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
557 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
558 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
559 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
560 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
561 @end ifset
562
563 @ifset Z8000
564 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
565 @end ifset
566
567 @c man end
568 @end smallexample
569
570 @c man begin OPTIONS
571
572 @table @gcctabopt
573 @include at-file.texi
574
575 @item -a[cdghlmns]
576 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
577
578 @table @gcctabopt
579 @item -ac
580 omit false conditionals
581
582 @item -ad
583 omit debugging directives
584
585 @item -ag
586 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
587
588 @item -ah
589 include high-level source
590
591 @item -al
592 include assembly
593
594 @item -am
595 include macro expansions
596
597 @item -an
598 omit forms processing
599
600 @item -as
601 include symbols
602
603 @item =file
604 set the name of the listing file
605 @end table
606
607 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
608 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
609 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
610
611 @item --alternate
612 Begin in alternate macro mode.
613 @ifclear man
614 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
615 @end ifclear
616
617 @item --compress-debug-sections
618 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
619 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
620 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
621
622 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
623 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
624
625 @item -D
626 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
627 other assemblers.
628
629 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
630 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
631 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
632
633 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
634 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
635 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
636 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
637 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
638 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
639
640 @item -f
641 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
642 compiler output).
643
644 @item -g
645 @itemx --gen-debug
646 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
647 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
648 ECOFF or DWARF2.
649
650 @item --gstabs
651 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
652 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
653
654 @item --gstabs+
655 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
656 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
657 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
658 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
659 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
660
661 @item --gdwarf-2
662 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
663 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
664 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
665
666 @item --gdwarf-sections
667 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
668 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
669 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
670 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
671 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
672 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
673 suffix.
674
675 @item --size-check=error
676 @itemx --size-check=warning
677 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
678
679 @item --help
680 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
681
682 @item --target-help
683 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
684
685 @item -I @var{dir}
686 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
687
688 @item -J
689 Don't warn about signed overflow.
690
691 @item -K
692 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
693 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
694 @end ifclear
695 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
696 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
697 @end ifset
698
699 @item -L
700 @itemx --keep-locals
701 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
702 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
703 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
704 @ifclear man
705 @xref{Symbol Names}.
706 @end ifclear
707
708 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
709 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
710 listing to @var{number}.
711
712 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
713 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
714 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
715
716 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
717 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
718 @var{number} bytes.
719
720 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
721 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
722 to @var{number} + 1.
723
724 @item -o @var{objfile}
725 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
726
727 @item -R
728 Fold the data section into the text section.
729
730 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
731 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
732 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
733 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
734 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
735 requirements at the expense of speed.
736
737 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
738 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
739 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
740 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
741
742 @item --statistics
743 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
744 assembly.
745
746 @item --strip-local-absolute
747 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
748
749 @item -v
750 @itemx -version
751 Print the @command{as} version.
752
753 @item --version
754 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
755
756 @item -W
757 @itemx --no-warn
758 Suppress warning messages.
759
760 @item --fatal-warnings
761 Treat warnings as errors.
762
763 @item --warn
764 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
765
766 @item -w
767 Ignored.
768
769 @item -x
770 Ignored.
771
772 @item -Z
773 Generate an object file even after errors.
774
775 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
776 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
777
778 @end table
779 @c man end
780
781 @ifset AARCH64
782
783 @ifclear man
784 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
785 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
786 @end ifclear
787
788 @ifset man
789 @c man begin OPTIONS
790 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
791 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
792 @c man end
793 @c man begin INCLUDE
794 @include c-aarch64.texi
795 @c ended inside the included file
796 @end ifset
797
798 @end ifset
799
800 @ifset ALPHA
801
802 @ifclear man
803 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
804 for an Alpha processor.
805 @end ifclear
806
807 @ifset man
808 @c man begin OPTIONS
809 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
810 processor.
811 @c man end
812 @c man begin INCLUDE
813 @include c-alpha.texi
814 @c ended inside the included file
815 @end ifset
816
817 @end ifset
818
819 @c man begin OPTIONS
820 @ifset ARC
821 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
822 an ARC processor.
823
824 @table @gcctabopt
825 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
826 This option selects the core processor variant.
827 @item -EB | -EL
828 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
829 @end table
830 @end ifset
831
832 @ifset ARM
833 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
834 processor family.
835
836 @table @gcctabopt
837 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
838 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
839 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
840 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
841 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
842 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
843 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
844 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
845 @item -mthumb
846 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
847 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
848 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
849 @item -EB | -EL
850 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
851 @item -mthumb-interwork
852 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
853 ARM code in mind.
854 @item -mccs
855 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
856 @item -k
857 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
858 @end table
859 @end ifset
860 @c man end
861
862 @ifset Blackfin
863
864 @ifclear man
865 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
866 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
867 @end ifclear
868
869 @ifset man
870 @c man begin OPTIONS
871 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
872 the Blackfin processor family.
873 @c man end
874 @c man begin INCLUDE
875 @include c-bfin.texi
876 @c ended inside the included file
877 @end ifset
878
879 @end ifset
880
881 @c man begin OPTIONS
882 @ifset CRIS
883 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
884 @end ifset
885
886 @ifset D10V
887 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
888 a D10V processor.
889 @table @gcctabopt
890 @cindex D10V optimization
891 @cindex optimization, D10V
892 @item -O
893 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
894 @end table
895 @end ifset
896
897 @ifset D30V
898 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
899 processor.
900 @table @gcctabopt
901 @cindex D30V optimization
902 @cindex optimization, D30V
903 @item -O
904 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
905
906 @cindex D30V nops
907 @item -n
908 Warn when nops are generated.
909
910 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
911 @item -N
912 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
913 @end table
914 @end ifset
915 @c man end
916
917 @ifset EPIPHANY
918 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
919 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
920
921 @ifclear man
922 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
923 configured for an Epiphany processor.
924 @end ifclear
925
926 @ifset man
927 @c man begin OPTIONS
928 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
929 an Epiphany processor.
930 @c man end
931 @c man begin INCLUDE
932 @include c-epiphany.texi
933 @c ended inside the included file
934 @end ifset
935
936 @end ifset
937
938 @ifset H8300
939
940 @ifclear man
941 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
942 for an H8/300 processor.
943 @end ifclear
944
945 @ifset man
946 @c man begin OPTIONS
947 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
948 processor.
949 @c man end
950 @c man begin INCLUDE
951 @include c-h8300.texi
952 @c ended inside the included file
953 @end ifset
954
955 @end ifset
956
957 @ifset I80386
958
959 @ifclear man
960 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
961 configured for an i386 processor.
962 @end ifclear
963
964 @ifset man
965 @c man begin OPTIONS
966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
967 an i386 processor.
968 @c man end
969 @c man begin INCLUDE
970 @include c-i386.texi
971 @c ended inside the included file
972 @end ifset
973
974 @end ifset
975
976 @c man begin OPTIONS
977 @ifset I960
978 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
979 Intel 80960 processor.
980
981 @table @gcctabopt
982 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
983 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
984
985 @item -b
986 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
987
988 @item -no-relax
989 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
990 error if necessary.
991
992 @end table
993 @end ifset
994
995 @ifset IP2K
996 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
997 Ubicom IP2K series.
998
999 @table @gcctabopt
1000
1001 @item -mip2022ext
1002 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1003
1004 @item -mip2022
1005 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1006 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1007
1008 @end table
1009 @end ifset
1010
1011 @ifset M32C
1012 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1013 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1014
1015 @table @gcctabopt
1016
1017 @item -m32c
1018 Assemble M32C instructions.
1019
1020 @item -m16c
1021 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1022
1023 @item -relax
1024 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1025
1026 @item -h-tick-hex
1027 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1028
1029 @end table
1030 @end ifset
1031
1032 @ifset M32R
1033 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1034 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1035
1036 @table @gcctabopt
1037
1038 @item --m32rx
1039 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1040 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1041
1042 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1043 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1044 encountered.
1045
1046 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1047 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1048 encountered.
1049
1050 @end table
1051 @end ifset
1052
1053 @ifset M680X0
1054 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1055 Motorola 68000 series.
1056
1057 @table @gcctabopt
1058
1059 @item -l
1060 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1061
1062 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1063 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1064 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1065 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1066 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1067
1068 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1069 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1070 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1071 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1072 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1073 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1074
1075 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1076 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1077 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1078
1079 @end table
1080 @end ifset
1081
1082 @ifset NIOSII
1083
1084 @ifclear man
1085 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1086 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1087 @end ifclear
1088
1089 @ifset man
1090 @c man begin OPTIONS
1091 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1092 Altera Nios II processor.
1093 @c man end
1094 @c man begin INCLUDE
1095 @include c-nios2.texi
1096 @c ended inside the included file
1097 @end ifset
1098 @end ifset
1099
1100 @ifset PDP11
1101
1102 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1103 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1104
1105 @table @gcctabopt
1106 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1107 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1108 default is @option{-mpic}.
1109
1110 @item -mall
1111 @itemx -mall-extensions
1112 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1113
1114 @item -mno-extensions
1115 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1116
1117 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1118 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1119
1120 @item -m@var{cpu}
1121 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1122 disable all other extensions.
1123
1124 @item -m@var{machine}
1125 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1126 model, and disable all other extensions.
1127 @end table
1128
1129 @end ifset
1130
1131 @ifset PJ
1132 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1133 a picoJava processor.
1134
1135 @table @gcctabopt
1136
1137 @cindex PJ endianness
1138 @cindex endianness, PJ
1139 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1140 @item -mb
1141 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1142
1143 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1144 @item -ml
1145 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1146
1147 @end table
1148 @end ifset
1149
1150 @ifset M68HC11
1151 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1152 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1153
1154 @table @gcctabopt
1155
1156 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1157 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1158 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1159
1160 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1161 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1162 XGATE address space.
1163
1164 @item -mshort
1165 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1166
1167 @item -mlong
1168 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1169
1170 @item -mshort-double
1171 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1172
1173 @item -mlong-double
1174 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1175
1176 @item --force-long-branches
1177 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1178 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1179 sub routine.
1180
1181 @item -S | --short-branches
1182 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1183 when the offset is out of range.
1184
1185 @item --strict-direct-mode
1186 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1187 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1188
1189 @item --print-insn-syntax
1190 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1191
1192 @item --print-opcodes
1193 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1194
1195 @item --generate-example
1196 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1197 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1198
1199 @end table
1200 @end ifset
1201
1202 @ifset SPARC
1203 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1204 for the SPARC architecture:
1205
1206 @table @gcctabopt
1207 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1208 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1209 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1210
1211 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1212 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1213
1214 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1215 UltraSPARC extensions.
1216
1217 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1218 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1219 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1220
1221 @item -bump
1222 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1223 @end table
1224 @end ifset
1225
1226 @ifset TIC54X
1227 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1228 architecture.
1229
1230 @table @gcctabopt
1231 @item -mfar-mode
1232 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1233 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1234 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1235 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1236 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1237 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1238 behaviour in the shell.
1239 @end table
1240 @end ifset
1241
1242 @ifset MIPS
1243 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1244 a MIPS processor.
1245
1246 @table @gcctabopt
1247 @item -G @var{num}
1248 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1249 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1250 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1251
1252 @cindex MIPS endianness
1253 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1254 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1255 @item -EB
1256 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1257
1258 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1259 @item -EL
1260 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1261
1262 @cindex MIPS ISA
1263 @item -mips1
1264 @itemx -mips2
1265 @itemx -mips3
1266 @itemx -mips4
1267 @itemx -mips5
1268 @itemx -mips32
1269 @itemx -mips32r2
1270 @itemx -mips32r3
1271 @itemx -mips32r5
1272 @itemx -mips64
1273 @itemx -mips64r2
1274 @itemx -mips64r3
1275 @itemx -mips64r5
1276 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1277 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1278 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1279 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1280 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1281 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2}, @samp{-mips64r3}, and
1282 @samp{-mips64r5} correspond to generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2,
1283 MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2,
1284 MIPS64 Release 3, and MIPS64 Release 5 ISA processors, respectively.
1285
1286 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1287 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1288
1289 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1290 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1291
1292 @item -mfix7000
1293 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1294 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1295 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1296
1297 @item -mfix-rm7000
1298 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1299 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1300 followed by a load instruction.
1301
1302 @item -mdebug
1303 @itemx -no-mdebug
1304 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1305 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1306
1307 @item -mpdr
1308 @itemx -mno-pdr
1309 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1310
1311 @item -mgp32
1312 @itemx -mfp32
1313 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1314 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1315 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1316 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1317
1318 @item -mips16
1319 @itemx -no-mips16
1320 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1321 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1322 turns off this option.
1323
1324 @item -mmicromips
1325 @itemx -mno-micromips
1326 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1327 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1328 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1329 at the start of the assembly file.
1330
1331 @item -msmartmips
1332 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1333 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1334 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1335 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1336
1337 @item -mips3d
1338 @itemx -no-mips3d
1339 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1340 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1341 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1342
1343 @item -mdmx
1344 @itemx -no-mdmx
1345 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1346 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1347 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1348
1349 @item -mdsp
1350 @itemx -mno-dsp
1351 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1352 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1353 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1354
1355 @item -mdspr2
1356 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1357 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1358 This option implies -mdsp.
1359 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1360 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1361
1362 @item -mmsa
1363 @itemx -mno-msa
1364 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1365 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1366 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1367
1368 @item -mxpa
1369 @itemx -mno-xpa
1370 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1371 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1372 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1373
1374 @item -mmt
1375 @itemx -mno-mt
1376 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1377 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1378 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1379
1380 @item -mmcu
1381 @itemx -mno-mcu
1382 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1383 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1384 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1385
1386 @item -minsn32
1387 @itemx -mno-insn32
1388 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1389 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1390 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1391 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1392 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1393 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1394 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1395
1396 @item --construct-floats
1397 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1398 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1399 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1400 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1401 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1402 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1403
1404 @item --relax-branch
1405 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1406 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1407 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1408 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1409
1410 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1411 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1412 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1413
1414 @cindex emulation
1415 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1416 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1417 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1418 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1419 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1420
1421 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1422 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1423 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1424 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1425 preferred options instead.
1426
1427 @item -nocpp
1428 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1429 the native tools.
1430
1431 @item --trap
1432 @itemx --no-trap
1433 @itemx --break
1434 @itemx --no-break
1435 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1436 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1437 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1438 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1439 break exception.
1440
1441 @item -n
1442 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1443 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1444 @end table
1445 @end ifset
1446
1447 @ifset MCORE
1448 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1449 an MCore processor.
1450
1451 @table @gcctabopt
1452 @item -jsri2bsr
1453 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1454 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1455 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1456
1457 @item -sifilter
1458 @itemx -nosifilter
1459 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1460 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1461
1462 @item -relax
1463 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1464
1465 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1466 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1467 can be assembled.
1468
1469 @item -EB
1470 Assemble for a big endian target.
1471
1472 @item -EL
1473 Assemble for a little endian target.
1474
1475 @end table
1476 @end ifset
1477 @c man end
1478
1479 @ifset METAG
1480
1481 @ifclear man
1482 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1483 for a Meta processor.
1484 @end ifclear
1485
1486 @ifset man
1487 @c man begin OPTIONS
1488 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1489 Meta processor.
1490 @c man end
1491 @c man begin INCLUDE
1492 @include c-metag.texi
1493 @c ended inside the included file
1494 @end ifset
1495
1496 @end ifset
1497
1498 @c man begin OPTIONS
1499 @ifset MMIX
1500 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1501 @end ifset
1502
1503 @ifset NDS32
1504
1505 @ifclear man
1506 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1507 for a NDS32 processor.
1508 @end ifclear
1509 @c ended inside the included file
1510 @end ifset
1511
1512 @ifset man
1513 @c man begin OPTIONS
1514 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1515 NDS32 processor.
1516 @c man end
1517 @c man begin INCLUDE
1518 @include c-nds32.texi
1519 @c ended inside the included file
1520 @end ifset
1521
1522 @c man end
1523 @ifset PPC
1524
1525 @ifclear man
1526 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1527 for a PowerPC processor.
1528 @end ifclear
1529
1530 @ifset man
1531 @c man begin OPTIONS
1532 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1533 PowerPC processor.
1534 @c man end
1535 @c man begin INCLUDE
1536 @include c-ppc.texi
1537 @c ended inside the included file
1538 @end ifset
1539
1540 @end ifset
1541
1542 @c man begin OPTIONS
1543 @ifset RX
1544 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1545 @end ifset
1546
1547 @ifset S390
1548 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1549 processor family.
1550
1551 @table @gcctabopt
1552 @item -m31
1553 @itemx -m64
1554 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1555 @item -mesa
1556 @item -mzarch
1557 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1558 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1559 @item -march=@var{processor}
1560 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1561 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1562 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1563 @item -mregnames
1564 @itemx -mno-regnames
1565 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1566 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1567 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1568 but evaluates to zero.
1569 @end table
1570 @end ifset
1571 @c man end
1572
1573 @ifset TIC6X
1574
1575 @ifclear man
1576 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1577 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1578 @end ifclear
1579
1580 @ifset man
1581 @c man begin OPTIONS
1582 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1583 TMS320C6000 processor.
1584 @c man end
1585 @c man begin INCLUDE
1586 @include c-tic6x.texi
1587 @c ended inside the included file
1588 @end ifset
1589
1590 @end ifset
1591
1592 @ifset TILEGX
1593
1594 @ifclear man
1595 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1596 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1597 @end ifclear
1598
1599 @ifset man
1600 @c man begin OPTIONS
1601 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1602 processor.
1603 @c man end
1604 @c man begin INCLUDE
1605 @include c-tilegx.texi
1606 @c ended inside the included file
1607 @end ifset
1608
1609 @end ifset
1610
1611 @ifset XTENSA
1612
1613 @ifclear man
1614 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1615 for an Xtensa processor.
1616 @end ifclear
1617
1618 @ifset man
1619 @c man begin OPTIONS
1620 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1621 Xtensa processor.
1622 @c man end
1623 @c man begin INCLUDE
1624 @include c-xtensa.texi
1625 @c ended inside the included file
1626 @end ifset
1627
1628 @end ifset
1629
1630 @c man begin OPTIONS
1631
1632 @ifset Z80
1633 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1634 a Z80 family processor.
1635 @table @gcctabopt
1636 @item -z80
1637 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1638 @item -r800
1639 Assemble for R800 processor.
1640 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1641 @itemx -Wnud
1642 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1643 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1644 @itemx -Wnup
1645 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1646 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1647 @itemx -Wud
1648 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1649 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1650 @itemx -Wup
1651 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1652 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1653 @itemx -Fud
1654 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1655 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1656 @itemx -Fup
1657 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1658 @end table
1659 @end ifset
1660
1661 @c man end
1662
1663 @menu
1664 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1665 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1666 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1667 * Command Line:: Command Line
1668 * Input Files:: Input Files
1669 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1670 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1671 @end menu
1672
1673 @node Manual
1674 @section Structure of this Manual
1675
1676 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1677 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1678 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1679 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1680 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1681
1682 @ifclear GENERIC
1683 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1684 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1685 @end ifclear
1686 @ifset GENERIC
1687 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1688 various flavors of the assembler.
1689 @end ifset
1690
1691 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1692 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1693 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1694 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1695 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1696 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1697 particular architecture.
1698 @ifset GENERIC
1699 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1700 machine architecture manual for this information.
1701 @end ifset
1702 @ifclear GENERIC
1703 @ifset H8/300
1704 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1705 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1706 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1707 @end ifset
1708 @ifset SH
1709 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1710 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1711 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1712 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1713 @end ifset
1714 @ifset Z8000
1715 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1716 @end ifset
1717 @end ifclear
1718
1719 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1720 @ignore
1721 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1722 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1723 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1724 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1725 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1726 qualification.
1727
1728 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1729 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1730 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1731 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1732 @end ignore
1733
1734 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1735 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1736 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1737 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1738 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1739 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1740 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1741 @c directives).
1742
1743 @node GNU Assembler
1744 @section The GNU Assembler
1745
1746 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1747
1748 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1749 @ifclear GENERIC
1750 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1751 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1752 @end ifclear
1753 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1754 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1755 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1756 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1757 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1758
1759 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1760 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1761 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1762 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1763 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1764 machine would assemble.
1765 @ifset VAX
1766 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1767 @end ifset
1768 @ifset M680X0
1769 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1770 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1771 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1772 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1773 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1774 @end ifset
1775
1776 @c man end
1777
1778 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1779 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1780 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1781
1782 @node Object Formats
1783 @section Object File Formats
1784
1785 @cindex object file format
1786 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1787 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1788 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1789 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1790 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1791 @ifclear GENERIC
1792 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1793 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1794 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1795 @end ifclear
1796 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1797 @ifset I960
1798 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1799 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1800 @end ifset
1801 @ifset HPPA
1802 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1803 SOM or ELF format object files.
1804 @end ifset
1805 @end ifclear
1806
1807 @node Command Line
1808 @section Command Line
1809
1810 @cindex command line conventions
1811
1812 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1813 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1814 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1815 significant.
1816
1817 @cindex standard input, as input file
1818 @kindex --
1819 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1820 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1821
1822 @cindex options, command line
1823 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1824 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1825 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1826 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1827 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1828
1829 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1830 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1831 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1832 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1833
1834 @smallexample
1835 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1836 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1837 @end smallexample
1838
1839 @node Input Files
1840 @section Input Files
1841
1842 @cindex input
1843 @cindex source program
1844 @cindex files, input
1845 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1846 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1847 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1848 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1849
1850 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1851 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1852 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1853 order specified.
1854
1855 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1856 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1857 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1858 (The standard input is also a file.)
1859
1860 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1861 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1862 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1863 is taken to be an input file name.
1864
1865 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1866 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1867 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1868 to assemble.
1869
1870 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1871 in your command line.
1872
1873 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1874 file.
1875
1876 @c man end
1877
1878 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1879
1880 @cindex input file linenumbers
1881 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1882 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1883 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1884 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1885 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1886
1887 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1888 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1889
1890 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1891 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1892 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1893 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1894 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1895 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1896
1897 @node Object
1898 @section Output (Object) File
1899
1900 @cindex object file
1901 @cindex output file
1902 @kindex a.out
1903 @kindex .o
1904 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1905 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1906 is the object file. Its default name is
1907 @ifclear BOUT
1908 @code{a.out}.
1909 @end ifclear
1910 @ifset BOUT
1911 @ifset GENERIC
1912 @code{a.out}, or
1913 @end ifset
1914 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1915 @end ifset
1916 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1917 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1918 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1919 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1920 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1921
1922 @cindex linker
1923 @kindex ld
1924 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1925 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1926 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1927 information for the debugger.
1928
1929 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1930 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1931
1932 @node Errors
1933 @section Error and Warning Messages
1934
1935 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1936
1937 @cindex error messages
1938 @cindex warning messages
1939 @cindex messages from assembler
1940 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1941 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1942 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1943 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1944 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1945
1946 @c man end
1947
1948 @cindex format of warning messages
1949 Warning messages have the format
1950
1951 @smallexample
1952 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1953 @end smallexample
1954
1955 @noindent
1956 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1957 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1958 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1959 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1960 @ifset GENERIC
1961 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1962 @end ifset
1963 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1964 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1965 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1966 tradition).
1967
1968 @cindex format of error messages
1969 Error messages have the format
1970 @smallexample
1971 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1972 @end smallexample
1973 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1974 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1975 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1976
1977 @node Invoking
1978 @chapter Command-Line Options
1979
1980 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1981 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1982 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1983 for options specific
1984 @ifclear GENERIC
1985 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1986 @end ifclear
1987 @ifset GENERIC
1988 to particular machine architectures.
1989 @end ifset
1990
1991 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1992
1993 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1994 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1995 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1996 by commas. For example:
1997
1998 @smallexample
1999 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2000 @end smallexample
2001
2002 @noindent
2003 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2004 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2005 local symbols in the symbol table).
2006
2007 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2008 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2009 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2010 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2011 assembler.)
2012
2013 @c man end
2014
2015 @menu
2016 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2017 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2018 * D:: -D for compatibility
2019 * f:: -f to work faster
2020 * I:: -I for .include search path
2021 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2022 * K:: -K for compatibility
2023 @end ifclear
2024 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2025 * K:: -K for difference tables
2026 @end ifset
2027
2028 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2029 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2030 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2031 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2032 * o:: -o to name the object file
2033 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2034 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2035 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2036 * v:: -v to announce version
2037 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2038 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2039 @end menu
2040
2041 @node a
2042 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2043
2044 @kindex -a
2045 @kindex -ac
2046 @kindex -ad
2047 @kindex -ag
2048 @kindex -ah
2049 @kindex -al
2050 @kindex -an
2051 @kindex -as
2052 @cindex listings, enabling
2053 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2054
2055 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2056 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2057 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2058 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2059 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2060 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2061 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2062 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2063 also.
2064
2065 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2066 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2067
2068 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2069 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2070 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2071 omitted from the listing.
2072
2073 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2074 listing.
2075
2076 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2077 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2078 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2079 @code{.sbttl}.
2080 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2081 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2082 listing-control directives have no effect.
2083
2084 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2085 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2086
2087 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2088 because it
2089 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2090 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2091 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2092 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2093 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2094
2095 @node alternate
2096 @section @option{--alternate}
2097
2098 @kindex --alternate
2099 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2100
2101 @node D
2102 @section @option{-D}
2103
2104 @kindex -D
2105 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2106 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2107 @command{@value{AS}}.
2108
2109 @node f
2110 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2111
2112 @kindex -f
2113 @cindex trusted compiler
2114 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2115 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2116 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2117 and comment preprocessing on
2118 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2119 ,Preprocessing}.
2120
2121 @quotation
2122 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2123 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2124 not work correctly.
2125 @end quotation
2126
2127 @node I
2128 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2129
2130 @kindex -I @var{path}
2131 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2132 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2133 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2134 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2135 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2136 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2137 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2138 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2139 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2140 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2141
2142 @node K
2143 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2144
2145 @kindex -K
2146 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2147 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2148 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2149 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2150 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2151 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2152 alteration on other platforms.
2153 @end ifclear
2154
2155 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2156 @cindex difference tables, warning
2157 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2158 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2159 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2160 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2161 is done.
2162 @end ifset
2163
2164 @node L
2165 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2166
2167 @kindex -L
2168 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2169 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2170 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2171 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2172 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2173 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2174 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2175 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2176
2177 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2178 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2179 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2180
2181 @node listing
2182 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2183
2184 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2185 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2186 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2187 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2188 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2189 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2190 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2191 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2192
2193 @table @gcctabopt
2194 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2195 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2196 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2197 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2198 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2199
2200 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2201 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2202 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2203 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2204 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2205 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2206 switch is used the default is to one.
2207
2208 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2209 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2210 @cindex Width of source line output
2211 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2212 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2213 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2214
2215 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2216 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2217 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2218 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2219 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2220 @end table
2221
2222 @node M
2223 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2224
2225 @kindex -M
2226 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2227 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2228 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2229 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2230 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2231 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2232 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2233 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2234 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2235
2236 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2237 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2238 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2239 individually. These are:
2240
2241 @itemize @bullet
2242 @item global symbols in common section
2243
2244 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2245 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2246 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2247 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2248 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2249
2250 @item complex relocations
2251
2252 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2253 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2254 are not support by other object file formats.
2255
2256 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2257
2258 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2259 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2260 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2261 script.
2262
2263 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2264
2265 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2266 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2267
2268 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2269
2270 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2271 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2272 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2273 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2274 assigned within a linker script.
2275 @end itemize
2276
2277 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2278 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2279 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2280
2281 @itemize @bullet
2282
2283 @item EBCDIC strings
2284
2285 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2286
2287 @item packed binary coded decimal
2288
2289 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2290 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2291
2292 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2293
2294 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2295
2296 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2297
2298 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2299
2300 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2301
2302 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2303 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2304 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2305 these options serve no purpose.
2306
2307 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2308
2309 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2310 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2311 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2312
2313 @item other @code{OPT} options
2314
2315 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2316 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2317
2318 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2319
2320 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2321 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2322
2323 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2324
2325 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2326
2327 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2328
2329 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2330
2331 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2332
2333 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2334
2335 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2336
2337 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2338
2339 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2340
2341 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2342
2343 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2344
2345 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2346
2347 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2348
2349 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2350
2351 @end itemize
2352
2353 @node MD
2354 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2355
2356 @kindex --MD
2357 @cindex dependency tracking
2358 @cindex make rules
2359
2360 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2361 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2362 dependencies of the main source file.
2363
2364 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2365
2366 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2367
2368 @node o
2369 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2370
2371 @kindex -o
2372 @cindex naming object file
2373 @cindex object file name
2374 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2375 default it has the name
2376 @ifset GENERIC
2377 @ifset I960
2378 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2379 @end ifset
2380 @ifclear I960
2381 @file{a.out}.
2382 @end ifclear
2383 @end ifset
2384 @ifclear GENERIC
2385 @ifset I960
2386 @file{b.out}.
2387 @end ifset
2388 @ifclear I960
2389 @file{a.out}.
2390 @end ifclear
2391 @end ifclear
2392 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2393 object file a different name.
2394
2395 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2396 existing file of the same name.
2397
2398 @node R
2399 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2400
2401 @kindex -R
2402 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2403 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2404 @cindex joining text and data sections
2405 @cindex merging text and data sections
2406 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2407 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2408 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2409 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2410 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2411 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2412
2413 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2414 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2415 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2416 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2417
2418 @ifset COFF-ELF
2419 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2420 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2421 @samp{.data}.
2422 @end ifset
2423
2424 @ifset HPPA
2425 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2426 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2427 @end ifset
2428
2429 @node statistics
2430 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2431
2432 @kindex --statistics
2433 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2434 @cindex time, total for assembly
2435 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2436 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2437 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2438 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2439 seconds).
2440
2441 @node traditional-format
2442 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2443
2444 @kindex --traditional-format
2445 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2446 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2447 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2448
2449 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2450 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2451
2452 @node v
2453 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2454
2455 @kindex -v
2456 @kindex -version
2457 @cindex assembler version
2458 @cindex version of assembler
2459 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2460 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2461 command line.
2462
2463 @node W
2464 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2465
2466 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2467 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2468 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2469 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2470
2471 @kindex -W
2472 @kindex --no-warn
2473 @cindex suppressing warnings
2474 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2475 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2476 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2477 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2478 are still reported.
2479
2480 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2481 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2482 @cindex warnings, causing error
2483 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2484 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2485
2486 @kindex --warn
2487 @cindex warnings, switching on
2488 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2489 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2490
2491 @node Z
2492 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2493 @cindex object file, after errors
2494 @cindex errors, continuing after
2495 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2496 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2497 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2498 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2499 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2500 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2501
2502 @node Syntax
2503 @chapter Syntax
2504
2505 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2506 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2507 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2508 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2509 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2510 @ifclear VAX
2511 assembler.
2512 @end ifclear
2513 @ifset VAX
2514 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2515 @end ifset
2516
2517 @menu
2518 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2519 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2520 * Comments:: Comments
2521 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2522 * Statements:: Statements
2523 * Constants:: Constants
2524 @end menu
2525
2526 @node Preprocessing
2527 @section Preprocessing
2528
2529 @cindex preprocessing
2530 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2531 @itemize @bullet
2532 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2533 @item
2534 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2535 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2536 a single space.
2537
2538 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2539 @item
2540 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2541 appropriate number of newlines.
2542
2543 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2544 @item
2545 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2546 @end itemize
2547
2548 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2549 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2550 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2551 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2552 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2553 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2554 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2555
2556 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2557 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2558 preprocessed.
2559
2560 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2561 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2562 @kindex #NO_APP
2563 @kindex #APP
2564 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2565 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2566 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2567 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2568 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2569 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2570 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2571 and whitespace.
2572
2573 @node Whitespace
2574 @section Whitespace
2575
2576 @cindex whitespace
2577 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2578 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2579 people to read. Unless within character constants
2580 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2581 as exactly one space.
2582
2583 @node Comments
2584 @section Comments
2585
2586 @cindex comments
2587 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2588 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2589
2590 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2591 This means you may not nest these comments.
2592
2593 @smallexample
2594 /*
2595 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2596 is to use this sort of comment.
2597 */
2598
2599 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2600 @end smallexample
2601
2602 @cindex line comment character
2603 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2604 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2605 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2606 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2607 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2608 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2609 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2610 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2611
2612 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2613 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2614 to specify logical line numbers:
2615
2616 @kindex #
2617 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2618 @cindex logical line numbers
2619 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2620 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2621 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2622 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2623 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2624
2625 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2626 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2627
2628 @smallexample
2629 # This is an ordinary comment.
2630 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2631 # This is logical line # 36.
2632 @end smallexample
2633 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2634 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2635
2636 @node Symbol Intro
2637 @section Symbols
2638
2639 @cindex characters used in symbols
2640 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2641 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2642 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2643 @samp{_.$}.
2644 @end ifclear
2645 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2646 @ifclear GENERIC
2647 @ifset H8
2648 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2649 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2650 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2651 symbol names.)
2652 @end ifset
2653 @end ifclear
2654 @end ifset
2655 @ifset GENERIC
2656 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2657 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2658 @end ifset
2659 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2660 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2661 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2662 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2663 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2664 @cindex length of symbols
2665
2666 @node Statements
2667 @section Statements
2668
2669 @cindex statements, structure of
2670 @cindex line separator character
2671 @cindex statement separator character
2672
2673 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2674 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2675 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2676 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2677 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2678 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2679 exception: they do not end statements.
2680
2681 @cindex newline, required at file end
2682 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2683 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2684 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2685
2686 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2687
2688 @cindex instructions and directives
2689 @cindex directives and instructions
2690 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2691 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2692 @c 13feb91.
2693 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2694 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2695 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2696 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2697 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2698 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2699 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2700 @ifset GENERIC
2701 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2702 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2703 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2704 language.@refill
2705 @end ifset
2706
2707 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2708 @cindex label (@code{:})
2709 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2710 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2711 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2712
2713 @ifset HPPA
2714 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2715 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2716 only one label may be defined on each line.
2717 @end ifset
2718
2719 @smallexample
2720 label: .directive followed by something
2721 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2722 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2723 @end smallexample
2724
2725 @node Constants
2726 @section Constants
2727
2728 @cindex constants
2729 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2730 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2731 @smallexample
2732 @group
2733 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2734 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2735 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2736 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2737 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2738 @end group
2739 @end smallexample
2740
2741 @menu
2742 * Characters:: Character Constants
2743 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2744 @end menu
2745
2746 @node Characters
2747 @subsection Character Constants
2748
2749 @cindex character constants
2750 @cindex constants, character
2751 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2752 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2753 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2754 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2755 used in arithmetic expressions.
2756
2757 @menu
2758 * Strings:: Strings
2759 * Chars:: Characters
2760 @end menu
2761
2762 @node Strings
2763 @subsubsection Strings
2764
2765 @cindex string constants
2766 @cindex constants, string
2767 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2768 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2769 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2770 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2771 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2772 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2773 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2774 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2775
2776 @cindex escape codes, character
2777 @cindex character escape codes
2778 @table @kbd
2779 @c @item \a
2780 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2781 @c
2782 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2783 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2784 @item \b
2785 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2786
2787 @c @item \e
2788 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2789 @c
2790 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2791 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2792 @item \f
2793 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2794
2795 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2796 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2797 @item \n
2798 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2799
2800 @c @item \p
2801 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2802 @c
2803 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2804 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2805 @item \r
2806 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2807
2808 @c @item \s
2809 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2810 @c other assemblers.
2811 @c
2812 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2813 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2814 @item \t
2815 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2816
2817 @c @item \v
2818 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2819 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2820 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2821 @c
2822 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2823 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2824 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2825 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2826 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2827 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2828
2829 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2830 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2831 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2832 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2833 lower case @code{x} works.
2834
2835 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2836 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2837 @item \\
2838 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2839
2840 @c @item \'
2841 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2842 @c This is needed in single character literals
2843 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2844 @c a @samp{'}.
2845 @c
2846 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2847 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2848 @item \"
2849 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2850 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2851
2852 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2853 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2854 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2855 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2856 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2857 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2858 code and warns you of the fact.
2859 @end table
2860
2861 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2862 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2863 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2864 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2865 sequence.
2866
2867 @node Chars
2868 @subsubsection Characters
2869
2870 @cindex single character constant
2871 @cindex character, single
2872 @cindex constant, single character
2873 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2874 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2875 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2876 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2877 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2878 grave accent. A newline
2879 @ifclear GENERIC
2880 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2881 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2882 @end ifclear
2883 @ifset abnormal-separator
2884 @ifset H8
2885 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2886 Renesas SH)
2887 @end ifset
2888 @end ifset
2889 @end ifclear
2890 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2891 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2892 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2893 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2894 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2895
2896 @node Numbers
2897 @subsection Number Constants
2898
2899 @cindex constants, number
2900 @cindex number constants
2901 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2902 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2903 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2904 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2905 are floating point numbers, described below.
2906
2907 @menu
2908 * Integers:: Integers
2909 * Bignums:: Bignums
2910 * Flonums:: Flonums
2911 @ifclear GENERIC
2912 @ifset I960
2913 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2914 @end ifset
2915 @end ifclear
2916 @end menu
2917
2918 @node Integers
2919 @subsubsection Integers
2920 @cindex integers
2921 @cindex constants, integer
2922
2923 @cindex binary integers
2924 @cindex integers, binary
2925 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2926 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2927
2928 @cindex octal integers
2929 @cindex integers, octal
2930 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2931 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2932
2933 @cindex decimal integers
2934 @cindex integers, decimal
2935 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2936 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2937
2938 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2939 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2940 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2941 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2942
2943 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2944 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2945 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2946
2947 @node Bignums
2948 @subsubsection Bignums
2949
2950 @cindex bignums
2951 @cindex constants, bignum
2952 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2953 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2954 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2955 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2956
2957 @node Flonums
2958 @subsubsection Flonums
2959 @cindex flonums
2960 @cindex floating point numbers
2961 @cindex constants, floating point
2962
2963 @cindex precision, floating point
2964 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2965 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2966 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2967 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2968 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2969 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2970
2971 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2972 @itemize @bullet
2973 @item
2974 The digit @samp{0}.
2975 @ifset HPPA
2976 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2977 @end ifset
2978
2979 @item
2980 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2981 @ifset GENERIC
2982 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2983 @ignore
2984 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2985 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2986 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2987 @end ignore
2988
2989 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2990 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2991 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2992
2993 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2994 (in upper or lower case).
2995
2996 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2997 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2998
2999 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3000 @end ifset
3001 @ifclear GENERIC
3002 @ifset ARC
3003 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3004 @end ifset
3005 @ifset H8
3006 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3007 @end ifset
3008 @ifset HPPA
3009 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3010 @end ifset
3011 @ifset I960
3012 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3013 @end ifset
3014 @end ifclear
3015
3016 @item
3017 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3018
3019 @item
3020 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3021
3022 @item
3023 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3024 or more decimal digits.
3025
3026 @item
3027 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3028
3029 @itemize @bullet
3030 @item
3031 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3032 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3033 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3034 @item
3035 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3036 @item
3037 One or more decimal digits.
3038 @end itemize
3039
3040 @end itemize
3041
3042 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3043 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3044
3045 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3046 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3047 @command{@value{AS}}.
3048
3049 @ifclear GENERIC
3050 @ifset I960
3051 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3052 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3053 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3054 @node Bit Fields
3055 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3056
3057 @cindex bit fields
3058 @cindex constants, bit field
3059 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3060 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3061 @example
3062 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3063 @end example
3064 @noindent
3065 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3066 @var{value}.
3067
3068 The resulting number is then packed
3069 @ifset GENERIC
3070 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3071 (in host-dependent byte order)
3072 @end ifset
3073 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3074 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3075 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3076 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3077 least significant digits.@refill
3078
3079 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3080 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3081 @end ifset
3082 @end ifclear
3083
3084 @node Sections
3085 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3086 @cindex sections
3087 @cindex relocation
3088
3089 @menu
3090 * Secs Background:: Background
3091 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3092 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3093 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3094 * bss:: bss Section
3095 @end menu
3096
3097 @node Secs Background
3098 @section Background
3099
3100 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3101 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3102 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3103
3104 @cindex linker, and assembler
3105 @cindex assembler, and linker
3106 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3107 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3108 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3109 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3110 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3111 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3112 sections.
3113
3114 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3115 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3116 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3117 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3118 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3119 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3120 the proper run-time addresses.
3121 @ifset H8
3122 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3123 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3124 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3125 @end ifset
3126
3127 @cindex standard assembler sections
3128 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3129 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3130 @dfn{bss} sections.
3131
3132 @ifset COFF-ELF
3133 @ifset GENERIC
3134 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3135 @end ifset
3136 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3137 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3138 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3139 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3140 @end ifset
3141
3142 @ifset HPPA
3143 @ifset GENERIC
3144 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3145 @end ifset
3146 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3147 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3148 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3149 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3150 assembler directives.
3151
3152 @ifset SOM
3153 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3154 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3155 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3156 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3157 @end ifset
3158 @end ifset
3159
3160 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3161 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3162
3163 @ifset HPPA
3164 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3165 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3166 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3167 @end ifset
3168
3169 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3170 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3171 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3172 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3173 file is mentioned:
3174 @itemize @bullet
3175 @item
3176 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3177 an address?
3178 @item
3179 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3180 @item
3181 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3182 @display
3183 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3184 @end display
3185 @item
3186 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3187 @end itemize
3188
3189 @cindex addresses, format of
3190 @cindex section-relative addressing
3191 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3192 @display
3193 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3194 @end display
3195 @noindent
3196 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3197 nature.
3198 @ifset SOM
3199 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3200 symbol-relative instead.)
3201 @end ifset
3202
3203 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3204 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3205
3206 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3207 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3208 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3209 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3210 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3211 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3212 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3213 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3214 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3215
3216 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3217 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3218 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3219 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3220 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3221 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3222 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3223
3224 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3225 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3226 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3227 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3228 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3229 data and bss sections.
3230
3231 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3232 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3233
3234 @node Ld Sections
3235 @section Linker Sections
3236 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3237
3238 @table @strong
3239
3240 @ifset COFF-ELF
3241 @cindex named sections
3242 @cindex sections, named
3243 @item named sections
3244 @end ifset
3245 @ifset aout-bout
3246 @cindex text section
3247 @cindex data section
3248 @itemx text section
3249 @itemx data section
3250 @end ifset
3251 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3252 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3253 true of another.
3254 @c @ifset aout-bout
3255 When the program is running, however, it is
3256 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3257 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3258 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3259 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3260 in the data section.
3261 @c @end ifset
3262
3263 @cindex bss section
3264 @item bss section
3265 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3266 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3267 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3268 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3269 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3270 those explicit zeros from object files.
3271
3272 @cindex absolute section
3273 @item absolute section
3274 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3275 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3276 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3277 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3278
3279 @cindex undefined section
3280 @item undefined section
3281 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3282 the preceding sections.
3283 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3284 @end table
3285
3286 @cindex relocation example
3287 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3288 @ifset COFF-ELF
3289 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3290 @end ifset
3291 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3292
3293 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3294 @ifnottex
3295 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3296 @smallexample
3297 +-----+----+--+
3298 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3299 +-----+----+--+
3300
3301 text data bss
3302 seg. seg. seg.
3303
3304 +---+---+---+
3305 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3306 +---+---+---+
3307
3308 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3309 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3310 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3311
3312 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3313 @end smallexample
3314 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3315 @end ifnottex
3316 @need 5000
3317 @tex
3318 \bigskip
3319 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3320 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3321 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3322
3323 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3324 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3325 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3326
3327 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3328 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3329 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3330 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3331 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3332
3333 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3334 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3335
3336 @end tex
3337 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3338
3339 @node As Sections
3340 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3341
3342 @cindex internal assembler sections
3343 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3344 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3345 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3346 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3347 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3348 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3349 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3350 section-relative address.
3351
3352 @table @b
3353 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3354 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3355 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3356 bug in the assembler.
3357
3358 @cindex expr (internal section)
3359 @item expr section
3360 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3361 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3362 it in the expr section.
3363 @c FIXME item debug
3364 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3365 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3366 @c FIXME item register
3367 @end table
3368
3369 @node Sub-Sections
3370 @section Sub-Sections
3371
3372 @cindex numbered subsections
3373 @cindex grouping data
3374 @ifset aout-bout
3375 Assembled bytes
3376 @ifset COFF-ELF
3377 conventionally
3378 @end ifset
3379 fall into two sections: text and data.
3380 @end ifset
3381 You may have separate groups of
3382 @ifset GENERIC
3383 data in named sections
3384 @end ifset
3385 @ifclear GENERIC
3386 @ifclear aout-bout
3387 data in named sections
3388 @end ifclear
3389 @ifset aout-bout
3390 text or data
3391 @end ifset
3392 @end ifclear
3393 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3394 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3395 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3396 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3397 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3398 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3399 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3400 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3401 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3402 constants being output.
3403
3404 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3405 goes in subsection number zero.
3406
3407 @ifset GENERIC
3408 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3409 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3410 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3411 @end ifset
3412 @ifclear GENERIC
3413 @ifset H8
3414 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3415 boundary (two bytes).
3416 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3417 @end ifset
3418 @ifset I960
3419 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3420 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3421 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3422 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3423 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3424 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3425 @end ifset
3426 @end ifclear
3427
3428 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3429 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3430 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3431 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3432 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3433 data subsections as a data section.
3434
3435 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3436 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3437 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3438 @ifset COFF
3439 @ifset GENERIC
3440 When generating COFF output, you
3441 @end ifset
3442 @ifclear GENERIC
3443 You
3444 @end ifclear
3445 can also use an extra subsection
3446 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3447 @var{expression}}.
3448 @end ifset
3449 @ifset ELF
3450 @ifset GENERIC
3451 When generating ELF output, you
3452 @end ifset
3453 @ifclear GENERIC
3454 You
3455 @end ifclear
3456 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3457 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3458 @end ifset
3459 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3460 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3461 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3462 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3463 @smallexample
3464 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3465 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3466 .text 1
3467 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3468 .data 0
3469 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3470 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3471 .text 0
3472 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3473 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3474 @end smallexample
3475
3476 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3477 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3478 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3479 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3480 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3481 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3482 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3483
3484 @node bss
3485 @section bss Section
3486
3487 @cindex bss section
3488 @cindex common variable storage
3489 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3490 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3491 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3492 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3493 section are zeroed bytes.
3494
3495 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3496 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3497
3498 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3499 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3500
3501 @ifset GENERIC
3502 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3503 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3504 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3505 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3506 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3507 @end ifset
3508
3509 @node Symbols
3510 @chapter Symbols
3511
3512 @cindex symbols
3513 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3514 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3515 to debug.
3516
3517 @quotation
3518 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3519 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3520 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3521 @end quotation
3522
3523 @menu
3524 * Labels:: Labels
3525 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3526 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3527 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3528 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3529 @end menu
3530
3531 @node Labels
3532 @section Labels
3533
3534 @cindex labels
3535 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3536 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3537 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3538 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3539 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3540 definitions.
3541
3542 @ifset HPPA
3543 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3544 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3545 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3546 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3547 @end ifset
3548
3549 @node Setting Symbols
3550 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3551
3552 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3553 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3554 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3555 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3556 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3557 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3558 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3559 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3560
3561 @ifset Blackfin
3562 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3563 @end ifset
3564
3565 @node Symbol Names
3566 @section Symbol Names
3567
3568 @cindex symbol names
3569 @cindex names, symbol
3570 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3571 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3572 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3573 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3574 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3575 particular target machine), and underscores.
3576 @end ifclear
3577 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3578 @ifset H8
3579 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3580 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3581 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3582 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3583 @end ifset
3584 @end ifset
3585
3586 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3587 than @code{Foo}.
3588
3589 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3590 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3591 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3592 currently supported.
3593
3594 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3595 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3596 in a program.
3597
3598 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3599
3600 @cindex local symbol names
3601 @cindex symbol names, local
3602 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3603 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3604 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3605 set of local label prefixes.
3606 @ifset HPPA
3607 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3608 @end ifset
3609
3610 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3611 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3612 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3613 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3614
3615 @subheading Local Labels
3616
3617 @cindex local labels
3618 @cindex temporary symbol names
3619 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3620 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3621 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3622 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3623 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3624 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3625 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3626 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3627 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3628 for ``forwards''.
3629
3630 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3631 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3632 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3633 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3634 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3635 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3636 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3637
3638 Here is an example:
3639
3640 @smallexample
3641 1: branch 1f
3642 2: branch 1b
3643 1: branch 2f
3644 2: branch 1b
3645 @end smallexample
3646
3647 Which is the equivalent of:
3648
3649 @smallexample
3650 label_1: branch label_3
3651 label_2: branch label_1
3652 label_3: branch label_4
3653 label_4: branch label_3
3654 @end smallexample
3655
3656 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3657 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3658 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3659 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3660 these parts:
3661
3662 @table @code
3663 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3664 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3665 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3666 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3667 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3668 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3669 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3670 you may use them in debugging.
3671
3672 @item @var{number}
3673 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3674 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3675
3676 @item @kbd{C-B}
3677 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3678 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3679
3680 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3681 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3682 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3683 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3684 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3685 @end table
3686
3687 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3688 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3689
3690 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3691 @cindex dollar local symbols
3692
3693 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3694 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3695 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3696 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3697 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3698 the same local label.
3699
3700 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3701 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3702 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3703
3704 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3705 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3706 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3707 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3708
3709 @node Dot
3710 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3711
3712 @cindex dot (symbol)
3713 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3714 @cindex current address
3715 @cindex location counter
3716 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3717 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3718 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3719 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3720 directive.
3721 @ifclear no-space-dir
3722 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3723 @samp{.space 4}.
3724 @end ifclear
3725
3726 @node Symbol Attributes
3727 @section Symbol Attributes
3728
3729 @cindex symbol attributes
3730 @cindex attributes, symbol
3731 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3732 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3733 attributes.
3734 @ifset INTERNALS
3735 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3736 @end ifset
3737
3738 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3739 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3740 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3741 would want.
3742
3743 @menu
3744 * Symbol Value:: Value
3745 * Symbol Type:: Type
3746 @ifset aout-bout
3747 @ifset GENERIC
3748 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3749 @end ifset
3750 @ifclear GENERIC
3751 @ifclear BOUT
3752 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3753 @end ifclear
3754 @ifset BOUT
3755 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3756 @end ifset
3757 @end ifclear
3758 @end ifset
3759 @ifset COFF
3760 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3761 @end ifset
3762 @ifset SOM
3763 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3764 @end ifset
3765 @end menu
3766
3767 @node Symbol Value
3768 @subsection Value
3769
3770 @cindex value of a symbol
3771 @cindex symbol value
3772 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3773 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3774 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3775 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3776 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3777 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3778 called absolute.
3779
3780 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3781 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3782 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3783 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3784 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3785 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3786 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3787 allocated storage.
3788
3789 @node Symbol Type
3790 @subsection Type
3791
3792 @cindex type of a symbol
3793 @cindex symbol type
3794 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3795 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3796 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3797 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3798
3799 @ifset aout-bout
3800 @ifclear GENERIC
3801 @ifset BOUT
3802 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3803 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3804 @need 1000
3805 @node a.out Symbols
3806 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3807
3808 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3809 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3810 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3811 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3812 @code{b.out}.
3813
3814 @end ifset
3815 @ifclear BOUT
3816 @node a.out Symbols
3817 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3818
3819 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3820 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3821
3822 @end ifclear
3823 @end ifclear
3824 @ifset GENERIC
3825 @node a.out Symbols
3826 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3827
3828 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3829 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3830
3831 @end ifset
3832 @menu
3833 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3834 * Symbol Other:: Other
3835 @end menu
3836
3837 @node Symbol Desc
3838 @subsubsection Descriptor
3839
3840 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3841 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3842 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3843 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3844 @command{@value{AS}}.
3845
3846 @node Symbol Other
3847 @subsubsection Other
3848
3849 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3850 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3851 @end ifset
3852
3853 @ifset COFF
3854 @node COFF Symbols
3855 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3856
3857 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3858 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3859
3860 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3861 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3862 @code{.endef} directives.
3863
3864 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3865
3866 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3867 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3868 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3869
3870 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3871
3872 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3873 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3874 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3875 table information for COFF.
3876 @end ifset
3877
3878 @ifset SOM
3879 @node SOM Symbols
3880 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3881
3882 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3883 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3884
3885 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3886 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3887
3888 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3889 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3890 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3891 @end ifset
3892
3893 @node Expressions
3894 @chapter Expressions
3895
3896 @cindex expressions
3897 @cindex addresses
3898 @cindex numeric values
3899 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3900 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3901
3902 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3903 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3904 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3905 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3906 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3907 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3908
3909 @menu
3910 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3911 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3912 @end menu
3913
3914 @node Empty Exprs
3915 @section Empty Expressions
3916
3917 @cindex empty expressions
3918 @cindex expressions, empty
3919 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3920 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3921 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3922 is compatible with other assemblers.
3923
3924 @node Integer Exprs
3925 @section Integer Expressions
3926
3927 @cindex integer expressions
3928 @cindex expressions, integer
3929 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3930 by @emph{operators}.
3931
3932 @menu
3933 * Arguments:: Arguments
3934 * Operators:: Operators
3935 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3936 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3937 @end menu
3938
3939 @node Arguments
3940 @subsection Arguments
3941
3942 @cindex expression arguments
3943 @cindex arguments in expressions
3944 @cindex operands in expressions
3945 @cindex arithmetic operands
3946 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3947 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3948 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3949 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3950 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3951 instruction operands.
3952
3953 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3954 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3955 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3956 integer.
3957
3958 Numbers are usually integers.
3959
3960 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3961 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3962 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3963 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3964 assemblers.
3965
3966 @cindex subexpressions
3967 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3968 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3969 operator followed by an argument.
3970
3971 @node Operators
3972 @subsection Operators
3973
3974 @cindex operators, in expressions
3975 @cindex arithmetic functions
3976 @cindex functions, in expressions
3977 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3978 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3979 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3980 whitespace.
3981
3982 @node Prefix Ops
3983 @subsection Prefix Operator
3984
3985 @cindex prefix operators
3986 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3987 one argument, which must be absolute.
3988
3989 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3990 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3991 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3992 @tex
3993 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3994 @end tex
3995
3996 @table @code
3997 @item -
3998 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3999 @item ~
4000 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4001 @end table
4002
4003 @tex
4004 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4005 @end tex
4006
4007 @node Infix Ops
4008 @subsection Infix Operators
4009
4010 @cindex infix operators
4011 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4012 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4013 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4014 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4015 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4016
4017 @enumerate
4018 @cindex operator precedence
4019 @cindex precedence of operators
4020
4021 @item
4022 Highest Precedence
4023
4024 @table @code
4025 @item *
4026 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4027
4028 @item /
4029 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4030
4031 @item %
4032 @dfn{Remainder}.
4033
4034 @item <<
4035 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4036
4037 @item >>
4038 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4039 @end table
4040
4041 @item
4042 Intermediate precedence
4043
4044 @table @code
4045 @item |
4046
4047 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4048
4049 @item &
4050 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4051
4052 @item ^
4053 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4054
4055 @item !
4056 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4057 @end table
4058
4059 @item
4060 Low Precedence
4061
4062 @table @code
4063 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4064 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4065 @cindex arguments for addition
4066 @item +
4067 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4068 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4069 sections.
4070
4071 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4072 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4073 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4074 @item -
4075 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4076 result has the section of the left argument.
4077 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4078 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4079 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4080
4081 @cindex comparison expressions
4082 @cindex expressions, comparison
4083 @item ==
4084 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4085 @item <>
4086 @itemx !=
4087 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4088 @item <
4089 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4090 @item >
4091 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4092 @item >=
4093 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4094 @item <=
4095 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4096
4097 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4098 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4099 perform signed comparisons.
4100 @end table
4101
4102 @item Lowest Precedence
4103
4104 @table @code
4105 @item &&
4106 @dfn{Logical And}.
4107
4108 @item ||
4109 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4110
4111 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4112 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4113 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4114 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4115
4116 @end table
4117 @end enumerate
4118
4119 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4120 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4121
4122 @node Pseudo Ops
4123 @chapter Assembler Directives
4124
4125 @cindex directives, machine independent
4126 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4127 @cindex machine independent directives
4128 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4129 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4130
4131 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4132 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4133 @ifset GENERIC
4134 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4135 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4136 @end ifset
4137 @ifclear GENERIC
4138 @ifset machine-directives
4139 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4140 @end ifset
4141 @end ifclear
4142
4143 @menu
4144 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4145 @ifset COFF
4146 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4147 @end ifset
4148
4149 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4150 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4151 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4152 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4153 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4154 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4155 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4156 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4157 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4158 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4159 @ifset COFF
4160 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4161 @end ifset
4162 @ifset aout-bout
4163 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4164 @end ifset
4165 @ifset COFF
4166 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4167 @end ifset
4168
4169 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4170 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4171 * Else:: @code{.else}
4172 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4173 * End:: @code{.end}
4174 @ifset COFF
4175 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4176 @end ifset
4177
4178 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4179 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4180 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4181 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4182 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4183 * Err:: @code{.err}
4184 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4185 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4186 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4187 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4188 * File:: @code{.file}
4189 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4190 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4191 * Func:: @code{.func}
4192 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4193 @ifset ELF
4194 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4195 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4196 @end ifset
4197
4198 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4199 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4200 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4201 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4202 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4203 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4204 @ifset ELF
4205 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4206 @end ifset
4207
4208 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4209 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4210 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4211 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4212 @ifclear no-line-dir
4213 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4214 @end ifclear
4215
4216 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4217 * List:: @code{.list}
4218 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4219 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4220 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4221 @ifset ELF
4222 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4223 @end ifset
4224
4225 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4226 @ignore
4227 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4228 @end ignore
4229
4230 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4231 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4232 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4233 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4234 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4235 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4236 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4237 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4238 @ifset ELF
4239 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4240 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4241 @end ifset
4242
4243 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4244 @ifset ELF
4245 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4246 @end ifset
4247
4248 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4249 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4250 @ifset ELF
4251 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4252 @end ifset
4253
4254 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4255 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4256 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4257 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4258 @ifset COFF
4259 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4260 @end ifset
4261 @ifset COFF-ELF
4262 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4263 @end ifset
4264
4265 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4266 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4267 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4268 @ifset COFF-ELF
4269 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4270 @end ifset
4271 @ifclear no-space-dir
4272 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4273 @end ifclear
4274
4275 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4276 @ifclear no-space-dir
4277 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4278 @end ifclear
4279 @ifset have-stabs
4280 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4281 @end ifset
4282
4283 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4284 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4285 @ifset ELF
4286 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4287 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4288 @end ifset
4289
4290 @ifset COFF
4291 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4292 @end ifset
4293
4294 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4295 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4296 @ifset COFF-ELF
4297 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4298 @end ifset
4299
4300 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4301 @ifset COFF
4302 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4303 @end ifset
4304
4305 @ifset ELF
4306 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4307 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4308 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4309 @end ifset
4310
4311 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4312 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4313 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4314 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4315 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4316 @end menu
4317
4318 @node Abort
4319 @section @code{.abort}
4320
4321 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4322 @cindex stopping the assembly
4323 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4324 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4325 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4326 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4327 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4328
4329 @ifset COFF
4330 @node ABORT (COFF)
4331 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4332
4333 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4334 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4335 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4336
4337 @ifset BOUT
4338 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4339 but ignores it.
4340 @end ifset
4341 @end ifset
4342
4343 @node Align
4344 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4345
4346 @cindex padding the location counter
4347 @cindex @code{align} directive
4348 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4349 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4350 required, as described below.
4351
4352 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4353 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4354 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4355 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4356 with no-op instructions.
4357
4358 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4359 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4360 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4361 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4362 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4363 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4364 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4365
4366 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4367 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4368 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4369 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4370 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4371 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4372 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4373
4374 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4375 strongarm, it is the
4376 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4377 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4378 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4379 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4380
4381 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4382 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4383 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4384 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4385 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4386
4387 @node Altmacro
4388 @section @code{.altmacro}
4389 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4390
4391 @ftable @code
4392 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4393 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4394 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4395 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4396 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4397 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4398 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4399
4400 @item String delimiters
4401 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4402 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4403
4404 @table @code
4405 @item '@var{string}'
4406 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4407
4408 @item <@var{string}>
4409 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4410 @end table
4411
4412 @item single-character string escape
4413 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4414 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4415 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4416 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4417
4418 @item Expression results as strings
4419 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4420 and use the result as a string.
4421 @end ftable
4422
4423 @node Ascii
4424 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4425
4426 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4427 @cindex string literals
4428 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4429 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4430 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4431
4432 @node Asciz
4433 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4434
4435 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4436 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4437 @cindex null-terminated strings
4438 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4439 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4440
4441 @node Balign
4442 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4443
4444 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4445 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4446 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4447 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4448 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4449 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4450 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4451
4452 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4453 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4454 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4455 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4456 with no-op instructions.
4457
4458 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4459 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4460 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4461 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4462 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4463 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4464 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4465
4466 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4467 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4468 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4469 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4470 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4471 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4472 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4473 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4474 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4475 undefined.
4476
4477 @node Bundle directives
4478 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4479 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4480 @cindex bundle
4481 @cindex instruction bundle
4482 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4483 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4484 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4485 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4486 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4487 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4488 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4489
4490 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4491 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4492 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4493 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4494 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4495 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4496 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4497 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4498 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4499 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4500 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4501
4502 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4503 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4504 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4505 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4506 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4507 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4508 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4509 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4510 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4511
4512 @cindex bundle-locked
4513 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4514 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4515 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4516 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4517 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4518 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4519 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4520 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4521 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4522 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4523 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4524 bundle size.
4525
4526 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4527 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4528 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4529 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4530 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4531 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4532
4533 @node Byte
4534 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4535
4536 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4537 @cindex integers, one byte
4538 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4539 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4540
4541 @node CFI directives
4542 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4543 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4544 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4545 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4546 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4547 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4548 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4549 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4550
4551 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4552 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4553 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4554 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4555 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4556 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4557
4558 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4559 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4560
4561 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4562 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4563 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4564 unwind entry previously opened by
4565 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4566
4567 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4568 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4569 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4570 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4571 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4572 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4573 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4574 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4575 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4576 no personality routine.
4577
4578 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4579 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4580 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4581 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4582 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4583 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4584 no LSDA.
4585
4586 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4587 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4588 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4589
4590 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4591 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4592 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4593 remains the same.
4594
4595 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4596 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4597 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4598 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4599 CFA address.
4600
4601 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4602 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4603 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4604
4605 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4606 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4607 CFA.
4608
4609 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4610 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4611 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4612 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4613 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4614 code it's annotating.
4615
4616 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4617 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4618
4619 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4620 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4621 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4622 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4623
4624 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4625 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4626
4627 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4628 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4629 i.e. no restoration needed.
4630
4631 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4632 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4633 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4634 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4635 the previous saved state.
4636
4637 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4638 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4639 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4640
4641 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4642 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4643
4644 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4645 SPARC register window has been saved.
4646
4647 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4648 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4649 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4650 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4651
4652 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4653 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4654 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4655 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4656
4657 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4658 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4659 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4660 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4661 or another register.
4662
4663 @node Comm
4664 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4665
4666 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4667 @cindex symbol, common
4668 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4669 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4670 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4671 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4672 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4673 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4674 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4675 using the largest size.
4676
4677 @ifset COFF-ELF
4678 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4679 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4680 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4681 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4682 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4683 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4684 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4685 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4686 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4687 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4688 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4689 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4690 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4691 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4692 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4693 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4694 @end ifset
4695
4696 @ifset HPPA
4697 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4698 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4699 @end ifset
4700
4701 @node Data
4702 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4703
4704 @cindex @code{data} directive
4705 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4706 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4707 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4708 to zero.
4709
4710 @ifset COFF
4711 @node Def
4712 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4713
4714 @cindex @code{def} directive
4715 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4716 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4717 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4718 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4719 @ifset BOUT
4720
4721 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4722 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4723 but ignored.
4724 @end ifset
4725 @end ifset
4726
4727 @ifset aout-bout
4728 @node Desc
4729 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4730
4731 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4732 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4733 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4734 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4735 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4736
4737 @ifset COFF
4738 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4739 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4740 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4741 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4742 @end ifset
4743 @end ifset
4744
4745 @ifset COFF
4746 @node Dim
4747 @section @code{.dim}
4748
4749 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4750 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4751 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4752 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4753 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4754 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4755 @ifset BOUT
4756
4757 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4758 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4759 ignores it.
4760 @end ifset
4761 @end ifset
4762
4763 @node Double
4764 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4765
4766 @cindex @code{double} directive
4767 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4768 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4769 assembles floating point numbers.
4770 @ifset GENERIC
4771 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4772 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4773 @end ifset
4774 @ifclear GENERIC
4775 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4776 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4777 in @sc{ieee} format.
4778 @end ifset
4779 @end ifclear
4780
4781 @node Eject
4782 @section @code{.eject}
4783
4784 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4785 @cindex new page, in listings
4786 @cindex page, in listings
4787 @cindex listing control: new page
4788 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4789
4790 @node Else
4791 @section @code{.else}
4792
4793 @cindex @code{else} directive
4794 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4795 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4796 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4797 was false.
4798
4799 @node Elseif
4800 @section @code{.elseif}
4801
4802 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4803 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4804 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4805 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4806
4807 @node End
4808 @section @code{.end}
4809
4810 @cindex @code{end} directive
4811 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4812 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4813
4814 @ifset COFF
4815 @node Endef
4816 @section @code{.endef}
4817
4818 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4819 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4820 @code{.def}.
4821 @ifset BOUT
4822
4823 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4824 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4825 directive but ignores it.
4826 @end ifset
4827 @end ifset
4828
4829 @node Endfunc
4830 @section @code{.endfunc}
4831 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4832 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4833
4834 @node Endif
4835 @section @code{.endif}
4836
4837 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4838 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4839 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4840 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4841
4842 @node Equ
4843 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4844
4845 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4846 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4847 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4848 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4849 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4850
4851 @ifset HPPA
4852 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4853 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4854 @end ifset
4855
4856 @ifset Z80
4857 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4858 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4859 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4860 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4861 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4862 @end ifset
4863
4864 @node Equiv
4865 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4866 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4867 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4868 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4869 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4870 undefined.
4871
4872 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4873 @smallexample
4874 .ifdef SYM
4875 .err
4876 .endif
4877 .equ SYM,VAL
4878 @end smallexample
4879 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4880
4881 @node Eqv
4882 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4883 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4884 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4885 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4886 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4887 value is taken.
4888
4889 @node Err
4890 @section @code{.err}
4891 @cindex @code{err} directive
4892 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4893 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4894 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4895
4896 @node Error
4897 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4898 @cindex error directive
4899
4900 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4901 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4902 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4903 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4904
4905 @smallexample
4906 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4907 @end smallexample
4908
4909 @node Exitm
4910 @section @code{.exitm}
4911 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4912
4913 @node Extern
4914 @section @code{.extern}
4915
4916 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4917 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4918 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4919 all undefined symbols as external.
4920
4921 @node Fail
4922 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4923
4924 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4925 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4926 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4927 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4928 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4929 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4930
4931 @node File
4932 @section @code{.file}
4933 @cindex @code{file} directive
4934
4935 @ifclear no-file-dir
4936 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4937 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4938 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4939
4940 @subheading Default Version
4941
4942 @cindex logical file name
4943 @cindex file name, logical
4944 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4945 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4946
4947 @smallexample
4948 .file @var{string}
4949 @end smallexample
4950
4951 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4952 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4953 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4954 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4955 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4956
4957 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4958 @end ifclear
4959
4960 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4961 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4962
4963 @smallexample
4964 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4965 @end smallexample
4966
4967 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4968 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4969 literal.
4970
4971 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4972 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4973 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4974 entries will have.
4975
4976 @node Fill
4977 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4978
4979 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4980 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4981 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4982 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4983 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4984 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4985 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4986 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4987 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4988 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4989 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4990 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4991 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4992 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4993
4994 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4995 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4996 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4997 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4998
4999 @node Float
5000 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5001
5002 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5003 @cindex @code{float} directive
5004 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5005 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5006 @ifset GENERIC
5007 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5008 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5009 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5010 @end ifset
5011 @ifclear GENERIC
5012 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5013 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5014 in @sc{ieee} format.
5015 @end ifset
5016 @end ifclear
5017
5018 @node Func
5019 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5020 @cindex @code{func} directive
5021 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5022 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5023 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5024 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5025 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5026 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5027 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5028 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5029
5030 @node Global
5031 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5032
5033 @cindex @code{global} directive
5034 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5035 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5036 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5037 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5038 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5039 from another file linked into the same program.
5040
5041 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5042 compatibility with other assemblers.
5043
5044 @ifset HPPA
5045 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5046 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5047 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5048 @end ifset
5049
5050 @ifset ELF
5051 @node Gnu_attribute
5052 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5053 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5054
5055 @node Hidden
5056 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5057
5058 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5059 @cindex visibility
5060 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5061 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5062 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5063
5064 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5065 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5066 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5067 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5068 @end ifset
5069
5070 @node hword
5071 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5072
5073 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5074 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5075 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5076 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5077 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5078 a 16 bit number for each.
5079
5080 @ifset GENERIC
5081 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5082 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5083 @end ifset
5084 @ifclear GENERIC
5085 @ifset W32
5086 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5087 @end ifset
5088 @ifset W16
5089 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5090 @end ifset
5091 @end ifclear
5092
5093 @node Ident
5094 @section @code{.ident}
5095
5096 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5097
5098 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5099 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5100 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5101 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5102 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5103 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5104 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5105
5106 @node If
5107 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5108
5109 @cindex conditional assembly
5110 @cindex @code{if} directive
5111 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5112 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5113 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5114 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5115 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5116 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5117 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5118 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5119
5120 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5121 @table @code
5122 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5123 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5124 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5125 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5126 is considered to be undefined.
5127
5128 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5129 @item .ifb @var{text}
5130 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5131
5132 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5133 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5134 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5135 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5136 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5137 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5138 string comparison is case sensitive.
5139
5140 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5141 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5142 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5143
5144 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5145 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5146 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5147
5148 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5149 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5150 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5151 equal to zero.
5152
5153 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5154 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5155 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5156
5157 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5158 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5159 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5160 to zero.
5161
5162 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5163 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5164 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5165
5166 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5167 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5168 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5169 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5170
5171 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5172 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5173 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5174 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5175
5176 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5177 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5178 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5179 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5180 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5181 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5182 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5183
5184 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5185 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5186 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5187 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5188
5189 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5190 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5191 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5192 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5193 @end table
5194
5195 @node Incbin
5196 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5197
5198 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5199 @cindex binary files, including
5200 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5201 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5202 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5203 around @var{file}.
5204
5205 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5206 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5207 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5208 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5209 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5210
5211 @node Include
5212 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5213
5214 @cindex @code{include} directive
5215 @cindex supporting files, including
5216 @cindex files, including
5217 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5218 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5219 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5220 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5221 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5222 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5223 around @var{file}.
5224
5225 @node Int
5226 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5227
5228 @cindex @code{int} directive
5229 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5230 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5231 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5232 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5233 of target the assembly is for.
5234
5235 @ifclear GENERIC
5236 @ifset H8
5237 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5238 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5239 32-bit integers.
5240 @end ifset
5241 @end ifclear
5242
5243 @ifset ELF
5244 @node Internal
5245 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5246
5247 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5248 @cindex visibility
5249 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5250 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5251 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5252
5253 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5254 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5255 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5256 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5257 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5258 @end ifset
5259
5260 @node Irp
5261 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5262
5263 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5264 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5265 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5266 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5267 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5268 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5269 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5270 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5271
5272 For example, assembling
5273
5274 @example
5275 .irp param,1,2,3
5276 move d\param,sp@@-
5277 .endr
5278 @end example
5279
5280 is equivalent to assembling
5281
5282 @example
5283 move d1,sp@@-
5284 move d2,sp@@-
5285 move d3,sp@@-
5286 @end example
5287
5288 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5289
5290 @node Irpc
5291 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5292
5293 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5294 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5295 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5296 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5297 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5298 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5299 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5300 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5301
5302 For example, assembling
5303
5304 @example
5305 .irpc param,123
5306 move d\param,sp@@-
5307 .endr
5308 @end example
5309
5310 is equivalent to assembling
5311
5312 @example
5313 move d1,sp@@-
5314 move d2,sp@@-
5315 move d3,sp@@-
5316 @end example
5317
5318 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5319 at @xref{Macro}.
5320
5321 @node Lcomm
5322 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5323
5324 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5325 @cindex local common symbols
5326 @cindex symbols, local common
5327 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5328 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5329 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5330 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5331 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5332 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5333
5334 @ifset GENERIC
5335 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5336 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5337 @end ifset
5338
5339 @ifset HPPA
5340 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5341 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5342 @end ifset
5343
5344 @node Lflags
5345 @section @code{.lflags}
5346
5347 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5348 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5349 assemblers, but ignores it.
5350
5351 @ifclear no-line-dir
5352 @node Line
5353 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5354
5355 @cindex @code{line} directive
5356 @cindex logical line number
5357 @ifset aout-bout
5358 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5359 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5360 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5361 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5362 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5363 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5364 @end ifset
5365
5366 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5367 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5368 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5369 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5370 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5371
5372 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5373 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5374 debugging.
5375 @end ifclear
5376
5377 @node Linkonce
5378 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5379 @cindex COMDAT
5380 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5381 @cindex common sections
5382 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5383 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5384 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5385 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5386 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5387 unique.
5388
5389 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5390 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5391 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5392
5393 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5394 following strings. For example:
5395 @smallexample
5396 .linkonce same_size
5397 @end smallexample
5398 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5399
5400 @table @code
5401 @item discard
5402 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5403
5404 @item one_only
5405 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5406
5407 @item same_size
5408 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5409
5410 @item same_contents
5411 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5412 @end table
5413
5414 @node List
5415 @section @code{.list}
5416
5417 @cindex @code{list} directive
5418 @cindex listing control, turning on
5419 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5420 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5421 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5422 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5423 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5424
5425 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5426 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5427 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5428
5429 @node Ln
5430 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5431
5432 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5433 @ifclear no-line-dir
5434 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5435 @end ifclear
5436 @ifset no-line-dir
5437 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5438 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5439 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5440 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5441 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5442 @ifset BOUT
5443
5444 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5445 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5446 output format.
5447 @end ifset
5448 @end ifset
5449
5450 @node Loc
5451 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5452 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5453 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5454 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5455 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5456 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5457 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5458 the row is added.
5459
5460 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5461
5462 @table @code
5463 @item basic_block
5464 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5465 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5466
5467 @item prologue_end
5468 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5469 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5470
5471 @item epilogue_begin
5472 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5473 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5474
5475 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5476 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5477 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5478 either 0 or 1.
5479
5480 @item isa @var{value}
5481 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5482 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5483
5484 @item discriminator @var{value}
5485 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5486 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5487
5488 @end table
5489
5490 @node Loc_mark_labels
5491 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5492 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5493 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5494 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5495 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5496 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5497 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5498 this function respectively.
5499
5500 @ifset ELF
5501 @node Local
5502 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5503
5504 @cindex @code{local} directive
5505 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5506 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5507 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5508 they will be created.
5509
5510 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5511 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5512 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5513 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5514 @end ifset
5515
5516 @node Long
5517 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5518
5519 @cindex @code{long} directive
5520 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5521
5522 @ignore
5523 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5524 @c what it really ought to do
5525 @node Lsym
5526 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5527
5528 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5529 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5530 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5531 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5532 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5533 the same as the expression value:
5534 @smallexample
5535 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5536 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5537 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5538 @end smallexample
5539 @noindent
5540 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5541 @end ignore
5542
5543 @node Macro
5544 @section @code{.macro}
5545
5546 @cindex macros
5547 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5548 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5549 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5550
5551 @example
5552 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5553 .long \from
5554 .if \to-\from
5555 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5556 .endif
5557 .endm
5558 @end example
5559
5560 @noindent
5561 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5562
5563 @example
5564 .long 0
5565 .long 1
5566 .long 2
5567 .long 3
5568 .long 4
5569 .long 5
5570 @end example
5571
5572 @ftable @code
5573 @item .macro @var{macname}
5574 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5575 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5576 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5577 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5578 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5579 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5580 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5581 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5582 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5583 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5584 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5585 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5586
5587 @table @code
5588 @item .macro comm
5589 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5590 arguments.
5591
5592 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5593 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5594 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5595 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5596 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5597
5598 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5599 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5600 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5601 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5602 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5603 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5604 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5605 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5606
5607 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5608 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5609 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5610 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5611 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5612
5613 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5614 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5615 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5616
5617 @end table
5618
5619 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5620 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5621 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5622 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5623 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5624 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5625 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5626 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5627 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5628 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5629 this macro definition:
5630
5631 @example
5632 .macro label l
5633 \l:
5634 .endm
5635 @end example
5636
5637 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5638 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5639 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5640 identifier.
5641
5642 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5643 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5644 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5645 length specifier like this:
5646
5647 @example
5648 .macro opcode base length
5649 \base.\length
5650 .endm
5651 @end example
5652
5653 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5654 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5655 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5656
5657 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5658
5659 @table @code
5660 @item Insert white space
5661 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5662 solution. eg:
5663
5664 @example
5665 .macro label l
5666 \l :
5667 .endm
5668 @end example
5669
5670 @item Use @samp{\()}
5671 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5672 the following text. eg:
5673
5674 @example
5675 .macro opcode base length
5676 \base\().\length
5677 .endm
5678 @end example
5679
5680 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5681 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5682 used as a separator. eg:
5683
5684 @example
5685 .altmacro
5686 .macro label l
5687 l&:
5688 .endm
5689 @end example
5690 @end table
5691
5692 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5693 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5694 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5695
5696 @item .endm
5697 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5698 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5699
5700 @item .exitm
5701 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5702 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5703
5704 @cindex number of macros executed
5705 @cindex macros, count executed
5706 @item \@@
5707 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5708 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5709 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5710
5711 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5712 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5713 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5714 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5715 @end ftable
5716
5717 @node MRI
5718 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5719
5720 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5721 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5722 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5723 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5724 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5725 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5726
5727 @node Noaltmacro
5728 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5729 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5730
5731 @node Nolist
5732 @section @code{.nolist}
5733
5734 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5735 @cindex listing control, turning off
5736 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5737 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5738 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5739 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5740 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5741
5742 @node Octa
5743 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5744
5745 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5746 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5747 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5748 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5749 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5750 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5751
5752 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5753 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5754
5755 @node Offset
5756 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5757
5758 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5759 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5760 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5761 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5762 directive.
5763
5764 @node Org
5765 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5766
5767 @cindex @code{org} directive
5768 @cindex location counter, advancing
5769 @cindex advancing location counter
5770 @cindex current address, advancing
5771 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5772 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5773 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5774 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5775 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5776 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5777 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5778 is the same as the current subsection.
5779
5780 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5781 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5782 backwards.
5783
5784 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5785 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5786 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5787 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5788 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5789 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5790
5791 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5792 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5793 people's assemblers.
5794
5795 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5796 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5797 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5798 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5799
5800 @node P2align
5801 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5802
5803 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5804 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5805 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5806 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5807 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5808 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5809 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5810 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5811
5812 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5813 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5814 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5815 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5816 with no-op instructions.
5817
5818 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5819 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5820 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5821 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5822 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5823 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5824 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5825
5826 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5827 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5828 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5829 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5830 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5831 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5832 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5833 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5834 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5835 undefined.
5836
5837 @ifset ELF
5838 @node PopSection
5839 @section @code{.popsection}
5840
5841 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5842 @cindex Section Stack
5843 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5844 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5845 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5846 (@pxref{Previous}).
5847
5848 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5849 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5850 stack.
5851 @end ifset
5852
5853 @ifset ELF
5854 @node Previous
5855 @section @code{.previous}
5856
5857 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5858 @cindex Section Stack
5859 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5860 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5861 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5862 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5863
5864 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5865 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5866 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5867 subsections). For example:
5868
5869 @smallexample
5870 .section A
5871 .subsection 1
5872 .word 0x1234
5873 .subsection 2
5874 .word 0x5678
5875 .previous
5876 .word 0x9abc
5877 @end smallexample
5878
5879 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5880 section A. Whilst:
5881
5882 @smallexample
5883 .section A
5884 .subsection 1
5885 # Now in section A subsection 1
5886 .word 0x1234
5887 .section B
5888 .subsection 0
5889 # Now in section B subsection 0
5890 .word 0x5678
5891 .subsection 1
5892 # Now in section B subsection 1
5893 .word 0x9abc
5894 .previous
5895 # Now in section B subsection 0
5896 .word 0xdef0
5897 @end smallexample
5898
5899 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5900 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5901
5902 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5903 the top section on the section stack.
5904 @end ifset
5905
5906 @node Print
5907 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5908
5909 @cindex @code{print} directive
5910 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5911 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5912
5913 @ifset ELF
5914 @node Protected
5915 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5916
5917 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5918 @cindex visibility
5919 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5920 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5921
5922 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5923 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5924 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5925 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5926 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5927 this.
5928 @end ifset
5929
5930 @node Psize
5931 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5932
5933 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5934 @cindex listing control: paper size
5935 @cindex paper size, for listings
5936 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5937 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5938
5939 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5940 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5941 default width is 200 columns.
5942
5943 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5944 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5945 @code{.eject}).
5946
5947 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5948 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5949
5950 @node Purgem
5951 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5952
5953 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5954 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5955 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5956
5957 @ifset ELF
5958 @node PushSection
5959 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5960
5961 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5962 @cindex Section Stack
5963 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5964 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5965 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5966 (@pxref{Previous}).
5967
5968 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5969 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5970 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5971 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5972 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5973 @end ifset
5974
5975 @node Quad
5976 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5977
5978 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5979 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5980 each bignum, it emits
5981 @ifclear bignum-16
5982 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5983 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5984 @cindex eight-byte integer
5985 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5986
5987 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5988 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5989 @end ifclear
5990 @ifset bignum-16
5991 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5992 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5993 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5994 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5995 @end ifset
5996
5997 @node Reloc
5998 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5999
6000 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6001 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6002 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6003 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6004 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6005 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6006 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6007 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6008 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6009 section.
6010
6011 @node Rept
6012 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6013
6014 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6015 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6016 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6017
6018 For example, assembling
6019
6020 @example
6021 .rept 3
6022 .long 0
6023 .endr
6024 @end example
6025
6026 is equivalent to assembling
6027
6028 @example
6029 .long 0
6030 .long 0
6031 .long 0
6032 @end example
6033
6034 @node Sbttl
6035 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6036
6037 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6038 @cindex subtitles for listings
6039 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6040 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6041 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6042
6043 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6044 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6045
6046 @ifset COFF
6047 @node Scl
6048 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6049
6050 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6051 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6052 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6053 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6054 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6055 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6056 symbolic debugging information.
6057 @ifset BOUT
6058
6059 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6060 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6061 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6062 @end ifset
6063 @end ifset
6064
6065 @ifset COFF-ELF
6066 @node Section
6067 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6068
6069 @cindex named section
6070 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6071 named @var{name}.
6072
6073 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6074 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6075 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6076
6077 @ifset COFF
6078 @ifset ELF
6079 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6080 @subheading COFF Version
6081 @end ifset
6082
6083 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6084 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6085 ways:
6086
6087 @smallexample
6088 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6089 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6090 @end smallexample
6091
6092 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6093 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6094 @table @code
6095 @item b
6096 bss section (uninitialized data)
6097 @item n
6098 section is not loaded
6099 @item w
6100 writable section
6101 @item d
6102 data section
6103 @item e
6104 exclude section from linking
6105 @item r
6106 read-only section
6107 @item x
6108 executable section
6109 @item s
6110 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6111 @item a
6112 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6113 @item y
6114 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6115 @item 0-9
6116 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6117 @end table
6118
6119 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6120 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6121 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6122 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6123 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6124
6125 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6126 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6127 @end ifset
6128
6129 @ifset ELF
6130 @ifset COFF
6131 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6132 @subheading ELF Version
6133 @end ifset
6134
6135 @cindex Section Stack
6136 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6137 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6138 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6139 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6140
6141 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6142 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6143
6144 @smallexample
6145 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6146 @end smallexample
6147
6148 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6149 combination of the following characters:
6150 @table @code
6151 @item a
6152 section is allocatable
6153 @item e
6154 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6155 @item w
6156 section is writable
6157 @item x
6158 section is executable
6159 @item M
6160 section is mergeable
6161 @item S
6162 section contains zero terminated strings
6163 @item G
6164 section is a member of a section group
6165 @item T
6166 section is used for thread-local-storage
6167 @item ?
6168 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6169 @end table
6170
6171 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6172 @table @code
6173 @item @@progbits
6174 section contains data
6175 @item @@nobits
6176 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6177 @item @@note
6178 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6179 @item @@init_array
6180 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6181 @item @@fini_array
6182 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6183 @item @@preinit_array
6184 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6185 @end table
6186
6187 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6188
6189 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6190 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6191 @code{%} character.
6192
6193 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6194 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6195
6196 @smallexample
6197 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6198 @end smallexample
6199
6200 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6201 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6202 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6203 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6204 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6205 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6206 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6207 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6208 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6209
6210 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6211 be present along with an additional field like this:
6212
6213 @smallexample
6214 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6215 @end smallexample
6216
6217 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6218 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6219 @table @code
6220 @item comdat
6221 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6222 @item .gnu.linkonce
6223 an alias for comdat
6224 @end table
6225
6226 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6227 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6228
6229 @smallexample
6230 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6231 @end smallexample
6232
6233 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6234 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6235 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6236 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6237 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6238 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6239
6240 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6241 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6242 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6243 executable. The section will contain data.
6244
6245 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6246 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6247
6248 @smallexample
6249 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6250 @end smallexample
6251
6252 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6253 separated flags:
6254 @table @code
6255 @item #alloc
6256 section is allocatable
6257 @item #write
6258 section is writable
6259 @item #execinstr
6260 section is executable
6261 @item #exclude
6262 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6263 @item #tls
6264 section is used for thread local storage
6265 @end table
6266
6267 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6268 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6269 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6270 work.
6271 @end ifset
6272 @end ifset
6273
6274 @node Set
6275 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6276
6277 @cindex @code{set} directive
6278 @cindex symbol value, setting
6279 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6280 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6281 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6282 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6283
6284 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6285
6286 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6287 file is the last value stored into it.
6288
6289 @ifset Z80
6290 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6291 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6292 @end ifset
6293
6294 @node Short
6295 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6296
6297 @cindex @code{short} directive
6298 @ifset GENERIC
6299 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6300 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6301
6302 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6303 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6304 @end ifset
6305 @ifclear GENERIC
6306 @ifset W16
6307 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6308 @end ifset
6309 @ifset W32
6310 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6311 a 16 bit number for each.
6312 @end ifset
6313 @end ifclear
6314
6315 @node Single
6316 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6317
6318 @cindex @code{single} directive
6319 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6320 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6321 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6322 @ifset GENERIC
6323 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6324 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6325 @end ifset
6326 @ifclear GENERIC
6327 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6328 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6329 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6330 @end ifset
6331 @end ifclear
6332
6333 @ifset COFF-ELF
6334 @node Size
6335 @section @code{.size}
6336
6337 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6338
6339 @ifset COFF
6340 @ifset ELF
6341 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6342 @subheading COFF Version
6343 @end ifset
6344
6345 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6346 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6347 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6348
6349 @smallexample
6350 .size @var{expression}
6351 @end smallexample
6352
6353 @ifset BOUT
6354 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6355 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6356 ignores it.
6357 @end ifset
6358 @end ifset
6359
6360 @ifset ELF
6361 @ifset COFF
6362 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6363 @subheading ELF Version
6364 @end ifset
6365
6366 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6367 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6368
6369 @smallexample
6370 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6371 @end smallexample
6372
6373 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6374 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6375 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6376 symbols.
6377 @end ifset
6378 @end ifset
6379
6380 @ifclear no-space-dir
6381 @node Skip
6382 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6383
6384 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6385 @cindex filling memory
6386 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6387 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6388 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6389 @samp{.space}.
6390 @end ifclear
6391
6392 @node Sleb128
6393 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6394
6395 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6396 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6397 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6398 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6399
6400 @ifclear no-space-dir
6401 @node Space
6402 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6403
6404 @cindex @code{space} directive
6405 @cindex filling memory
6406 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6407 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6408 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6409 as @samp{.skip}.
6410
6411 @ifset HPPA
6412 @quotation
6413 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6414 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6415 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6416 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6417 for a summary.
6418 @end quotation
6419 @end ifset
6420 @end ifclear
6421
6422 @ifset have-stabs
6423 @node Stab
6424 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6425
6426 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6427 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6428 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6429 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6430 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6431 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6432 Up to five fields are required:
6433
6434 @table @var
6435 @item string
6436 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6437 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6438 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6439 using this field.
6440
6441 @item type
6442 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6443 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6444 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6445
6446 @item other
6447 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6448 low 8 bits of this expression.
6449
6450 @item desc
6451 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6452 bits of this expression.
6453
6454 @item value
6455 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6456 @end table
6457
6458 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6459 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6460 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6461 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6462
6463 @table @code
6464 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6465 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6466
6467 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6468 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6469 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6470 strings.
6471
6472 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6473 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6474 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6475 assembled.
6476
6477 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6478 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6479 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6480
6481 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6482 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6483 All five fields are specified.
6484 @end table
6485 @end ifset
6486 @c end have-stabs
6487
6488 @node String
6489 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6490 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6491
6492 @cindex string, copying to object file
6493 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6494 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6495 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6496 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6497 @cindex @code{string} directive
6498 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6499 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6500 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6501 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6502
6503 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6504 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6505 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6506 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6507
6508 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6509 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6510 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6511 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6512
6513 Example:
6514 @smallexample
6515 .string32 "BYE"
6516 expands to:
6517 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6518 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6519 @end smallexample
6520
6521
6522 @node Struct
6523 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6524
6525 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6526 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6527 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6528 @smallexample
6529 .struct 0
6530 field1:
6531 .struct field1 + 4
6532 field2:
6533 .struct field2 + 4
6534 field3:
6535 @end smallexample
6536 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6537 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6538 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6539 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6540 before further assembly.
6541
6542 @ifset ELF
6543 @node SubSection
6544 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6545
6546 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6547 @cindex Section Stack
6548 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6549 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6550 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6551 (@pxref{Previous}).
6552
6553 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6554 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6555 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6556 @end ifset
6557
6558 @ifset ELF
6559 @node Symver
6560 @section @code{.symver}
6561 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6562 @cindex symbol versioning
6563 @cindex versions of symbols
6564 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6565 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6566 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6567 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6568 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6569 shared library.
6570
6571 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6572 @smallexample
6573 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6574 @end smallexample
6575 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6576 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6577 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6578 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6579 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6580 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6581 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6582 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6583 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6584 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6585 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6586 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6587 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6588 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6589
6590 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6591 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6592 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6593 symbol table.
6594
6595 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6596 @smallexample
6597 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6598 @end smallexample
6599 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6600 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6601 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6602 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6603
6604 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6605 @smallexample
6606 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6607 @end smallexample
6608 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6609 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6610 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6611 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6612 @end ifset
6613
6614 @ifset COFF
6615 @node Tag
6616 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6617
6618 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6619 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6620 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6621 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6622 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6623 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6624 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6625 @ifset BOUT
6626
6627 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6628 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6629 ignores it.
6630 @end ifset
6631 @end ifset
6632
6633 @node Text
6634 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6635
6636 @cindex @code{text} directive
6637 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6638 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6639 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6640 is used.
6641
6642 @node Title
6643 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6644
6645 @cindex @code{title} directive
6646 @cindex listing control: title line
6647 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6648 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6649
6650 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6651 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6652
6653 @ifset COFF-ELF
6654 @node Type
6655 @section @code{.type}
6656
6657 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6658
6659 @ifset COFF
6660 @ifset ELF
6661 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6662 @subheading COFF Version
6663 @end ifset
6664
6665 @cindex COFF symbol type
6666 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6667 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6668 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6669 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6670
6671 @smallexample
6672 .type @var{int}
6673 @end smallexample
6674
6675 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6676 entry.
6677
6678 @ifset BOUT
6679 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6680 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6681 directive but ignores it.
6682 @end ifset
6683 @end ifset
6684
6685 @ifset ELF
6686 @ifset COFF
6687 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6688 @subheading ELF Version
6689 @end ifset
6690
6691 @cindex ELF symbol type
6692 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6693 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6694 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6695
6696 @smallexample
6697 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6698 @end smallexample
6699
6700 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6701 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6702 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6703 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6704
6705 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6706 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6707 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6708 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6709 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6710 assemblers.
6711
6712 The syntaxes supported are:
6713
6714 @smallexample
6715 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6716 .type <name>,#<type>
6717 .type <name>,@@<type>
6718 .type <name>,%<type>
6719 .type <name>,"<type>"
6720 @end smallexample
6721
6722 The types supported are:
6723
6724 @table @gcctabopt
6725 @item STT_FUNC
6726 @itemx function
6727 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6728
6729 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6730 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6731 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6732 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6733
6734 @item STT_OBJECT
6735 @itemx object
6736 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6737
6738 @item STT_TLS
6739 @itemx tls_object
6740 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6741
6742 @item STT_COMMON
6743 @itemx common
6744 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6745
6746 @item STT_NOTYPE
6747 @itemx notype
6748 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6749
6750 @item gnu_unique_object
6751 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6752 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6753 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6754 systems).
6755
6756 @end table
6757
6758 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6759
6760 @end ifset
6761 @end ifset
6762
6763 @node Uleb128
6764 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6765
6766 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6767 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6768 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6769 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6770
6771 @ifset COFF
6772 @node Val
6773 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6774
6775 @cindex @code{val} directive
6776 @cindex COFF value attribute
6777 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6778 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6779 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6780 entry.
6781 @ifset BOUT
6782
6783 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6784 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6785 @end ifset
6786 @end ifset
6787
6788 @ifset ELF
6789 @node Version
6790 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6791
6792 @cindex @code{version} directive
6793 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6794 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6795 @end ifset
6796
6797 @ifset ELF
6798 @node VTableEntry
6799 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6800
6801 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6802 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6803 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6804
6805 @node VTableInherit
6806 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6807
6808 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6809 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6810 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6811 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6812 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6813 @end ifset
6814
6815 @node Warning
6816 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6817 @cindex warning directive
6818 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6819 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6820
6821 @node Weak
6822 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6823
6824 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6825 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6826 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6827
6828 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6829 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6830 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6831
6832 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6833 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6834 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6835
6836 @node Weakref
6837 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6838
6839 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6840 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6841 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6842 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6843 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6844 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6845
6846 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6847 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6848 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6849 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6850 had the references to the alias removed.
6851
6852 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6853 within the assembler.
6854
6855 @node Word
6856 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6857
6858 @cindex @code{word} directive
6859 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6860 separated by commas.
6861 @ifclear GENERIC
6862 @ifset W32
6863 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6864 @end ifset
6865 @ifset W16
6866 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6867 @end ifset
6868 @end ifclear
6869 @ifset GENERIC
6870
6871 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6872 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6873 @end ifset
6874
6875 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6876 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6877 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6878 @cindex difference tables altered
6879 @cindex altered difference tables
6880 @quotation
6881 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6882 @end quotation
6883
6884 @ifset GENERIC
6885 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6886 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6887 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6888 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6889
6890 @end ifset
6891 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6892 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6893 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6894 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6895 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6896 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6897 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6898 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6899 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6900 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6901 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6902 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6903 @code{sym2}.
6904
6905 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6906 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6907 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6908 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6909 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6910 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6911 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6912
6913 @ifset INTERNALS
6914 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6915 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6916 assembly language programmers.
6917 @end ifset
6918 @end ifset
6919 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6920
6921 @node Deprecated
6922 @section Deprecated Directives
6923
6924 @cindex deprecated directives
6925 @cindex obsolescent directives
6926 One day these directives won't work.
6927 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6928 @table @t
6929 @item .abort
6930 @item .line
6931 @end table
6932
6933 @ifset ELF
6934 @node Object Attributes
6935 @chapter Object Attributes
6936 @cindex object attributes
6937
6938 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6939 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6940 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6941 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6942 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6943 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6944 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6945 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6946 newer generation at run-time.
6947
6948 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6949 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6950 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6951 correctly.
6952
6953 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6954 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6955 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6956 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6957 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6958 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6959
6960 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6961 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6962
6963 @menu
6964 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6965 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6966 @end menu
6967
6968 @node GNU Object Attributes
6969 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6970
6971 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6972 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6973
6974 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6975 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6976 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6977 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6978 architecture-dependent ones.
6979
6980 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6981
6982 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6983
6984 @table @r
6985 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6986 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6987 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6988 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6989 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6990 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6991 @end table
6992
6993 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6994
6995 @table @r
6996 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6997 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6998
6999 @itemize @bullet
7000 @item
7001 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7002 @item
7003 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
7004 FPU.
7005 @item
7006 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7007 @item
7008 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7009 @item
7010 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
7011 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
7012 purpose registers.
7013 @end itemize
7014 @end table
7015
7016 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7017
7018 @table @r
7019 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7020 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7021
7022 @itemize @bullet
7023 @item
7024 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7025 @item
7026 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7027 @item
7028 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7029 @item
7030 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7031 @end itemize
7032
7033 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7034 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7035
7036 @itemize @bullet
7037 @item
7038 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7039 @item
7040 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7041 @item
7042 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7043 @item
7044 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7045 @end itemize
7046 @end table
7047
7048 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7049 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7050
7051 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7052 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7053 mailing list.
7054
7055 @itemize @bullet
7056 @item
7057 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7058 @item
7059 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7060 @item
7061 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7062 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7063 @item
7064 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7065 @item
7066 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7067 @item
7068 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7069 @end itemize
7070
7071 @end ifset
7072
7073 @ifset GENERIC
7074 @node Machine Dependencies
7075 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7076
7077 @cindex machine dependencies
7078 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7079 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7080 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7081 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7082 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7083 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7084 optimization.
7085
7086 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7087 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7088 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7089
7090 @menu
7091 @ifset AARCH64
7092 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7093 @end ifset
7094 @ifset ALPHA
7095 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7096 @end ifset
7097 @ifset ARC
7098 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7099 @end ifset
7100 @ifset ARM
7101 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7102 @end ifset
7103 @ifset AVR
7104 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7105 @end ifset
7106 @ifset Blackfin
7107 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7108 @end ifset
7109 @ifset CR16
7110 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7111 @end ifset
7112 @ifset CRIS
7113 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7114 @end ifset
7115 @ifset D10V
7116 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7117 @end ifset
7118 @ifset D30V
7119 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7120 @end ifset
7121 @ifset EPIPHANY
7122 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7123 @end ifset
7124 @ifset H8/300
7125 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7126 @end ifset
7127 @ifset HPPA
7128 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7129 @end ifset
7130 @ifset I370
7131 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7132 @end ifset
7133 @ifset I80386
7134 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7135 @end ifset
7136 @ifset I860
7137 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7138 @end ifset
7139 @ifset I960
7140 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7141 @end ifset
7142 @ifset IA64
7143 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7144 @end ifset
7145 @ifset IP2K
7146 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7147 @end ifset
7148 @ifset LM32
7149 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7150 @end ifset
7151 @ifset M32C
7152 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7153 @end ifset
7154 @ifset M32R
7155 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7156 @end ifset
7157 @ifset M680X0
7158 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7159 @end ifset
7160 @ifset M68HC11
7161 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7162 @end ifset
7163 @ifset METAG
7164 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7165 @end ifset
7166 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7167 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7168 @end ifset
7169 @ifset MIPS
7170 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7171 @end ifset
7172 @ifset MMIX
7173 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7174 @end ifset
7175 @ifset MSP430
7176 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7177 @end ifset
7178 @ifset NDS32
7179 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7180 @end ifset
7181 @ifset NIOSII
7182 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7183 @end ifset
7184 @ifset NS32K
7185 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7186 @end ifset
7187 @ifset SH
7188 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7189 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7190 @end ifset
7191 @ifset PDP11
7192 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7193 @end ifset
7194 @ifset PJ
7195 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7196 @end ifset
7197 @ifset PPC
7198 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7199 @end ifset
7200 @ifset RL78
7201 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7202 @end ifset
7203 @ifset RX
7204 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7205 @end ifset
7206 @ifset S390
7207 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7208 @end ifset
7209 @ifset SCORE
7210 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7211 @end ifset
7212 @ifset SPARC
7213 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7214 @end ifset
7215 @ifset TIC54X
7216 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7217 @end ifset
7218 @ifset TIC6X
7219 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7220 @end ifset
7221 @ifset TILEGX
7222 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7223 @end ifset
7224 @ifset TILEPRO
7225 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7226 @end ifset
7227 @ifset V850
7228 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7229 @end ifset
7230 @ifset XGATE
7231 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7232 @end ifset
7233 @ifset XSTORMY16
7234 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7235 @end ifset
7236 @ifset XTENSA
7237 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7238 @end ifset
7239 @ifset Z80
7240 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7241 @end ifset
7242 @ifset Z8000
7243 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7244 @end ifset
7245 @ifset VAX
7246 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7247 @end ifset
7248 @end menu
7249
7250 @lowersections
7251 @end ifset
7252
7253 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7254 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7255 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7256 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7257 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7258 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7259 @c in both conditional blocks.
7260
7261 @ifset AARCH64
7262 @include c-aarch64.texi
7263 @end ifset
7264
7265 @ifset ALPHA
7266 @include c-alpha.texi
7267 @end ifset
7268
7269 @ifset ARC
7270 @include c-arc.texi
7271 @end ifset
7272
7273 @ifset ARM
7274 @include c-arm.texi
7275 @end ifset
7276
7277 @ifset AVR
7278 @include c-avr.texi
7279 @end ifset
7280
7281 @ifset Blackfin
7282 @include c-bfin.texi
7283 @end ifset
7284
7285 @ifset CR16
7286 @include c-cr16.texi
7287 @end ifset
7288
7289 @ifset CRIS
7290 @include c-cris.texi
7291 @end ifset
7292
7293 @ifset Renesas-all
7294 @ifclear GENERIC
7295 @node Machine Dependencies
7296 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7297
7298 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7299 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7300 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7301 family.
7302
7303 @menu
7304 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7305 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7306 @end menu
7307 @lowersections
7308 @end ifclear
7309 @end ifset
7310
7311 @ifset D10V
7312 @include c-d10v.texi
7313 @end ifset
7314
7315 @ifset D30V
7316 @include c-d30v.texi
7317 @end ifset
7318
7319 @ifset EPIPHANY
7320 @include c-epiphany.texi
7321 @end ifset
7322
7323 @ifset H8/300
7324 @include c-h8300.texi
7325 @end ifset
7326
7327 @ifset HPPA
7328 @include c-hppa.texi
7329 @end ifset
7330
7331 @ifset I370
7332 @include c-i370.texi
7333 @end ifset
7334
7335 @ifset I80386
7336 @include c-i386.texi
7337 @end ifset
7338
7339 @ifset I860
7340 @include c-i860.texi
7341 @end ifset
7342
7343 @ifset I960
7344 @include c-i960.texi
7345 @end ifset
7346
7347 @ifset IA64
7348 @include c-ia64.texi
7349 @end ifset
7350
7351 @ifset IP2K
7352 @include c-ip2k.texi
7353 @end ifset
7354
7355 @ifset LM32
7356 @include c-lm32.texi
7357 @end ifset
7358
7359 @ifset M32C
7360 @include c-m32c.texi
7361 @end ifset
7362
7363 @ifset M32R
7364 @include c-m32r.texi
7365 @end ifset
7366
7367 @ifset M680X0
7368 @include c-m68k.texi
7369 @end ifset
7370
7371 @ifset M68HC11
7372 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7373 @end ifset
7374
7375 @ifset METAG
7376 @include c-metag.texi
7377 @end ifset
7378
7379 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7380 @include c-microblaze.texi
7381 @end ifset
7382
7383 @ifset MIPS
7384 @include c-mips.texi
7385 @end ifset
7386
7387 @ifset MMIX
7388 @include c-mmix.texi
7389 @end ifset
7390
7391 @ifset MSP430
7392 @include c-msp430.texi
7393 @end ifset
7394
7395 @ifset NDS32
7396 @include c-nds32.texi
7397 @end ifset
7398
7399 @ifset NIOSII
7400 @include c-nios2.texi
7401 @end ifset
7402
7403 @ifset NS32K
7404 @include c-ns32k.texi
7405 @end ifset
7406
7407 @ifset PDP11
7408 @include c-pdp11.texi
7409 @end ifset
7410
7411 @ifset PJ
7412 @include c-pj.texi
7413 @end ifset
7414
7415 @ifset PPC
7416 @include c-ppc.texi
7417 @end ifset
7418
7419 @ifset RL78
7420 @include c-rl78.texi
7421 @end ifset
7422
7423 @ifset RX
7424 @include c-rx.texi
7425 @end ifset
7426
7427 @ifset S390
7428 @include c-s390.texi
7429 @end ifset
7430
7431 @ifset SCORE
7432 @include c-score.texi
7433 @end ifset
7434
7435 @ifset SH
7436 @include c-sh.texi
7437 @include c-sh64.texi
7438 @end ifset
7439
7440 @ifset SPARC
7441 @include c-sparc.texi
7442 @end ifset
7443
7444 @ifset TIC54X
7445 @include c-tic54x.texi
7446 @end ifset
7447
7448 @ifset TIC6X
7449 @include c-tic6x.texi
7450 @end ifset
7451
7452 @ifset TILEGX
7453 @include c-tilegx.texi
7454 @end ifset
7455
7456 @ifset TILEPRO
7457 @include c-tilepro.texi
7458 @end ifset
7459
7460 @ifset Z80
7461 @include c-z80.texi
7462 @end ifset
7463
7464 @ifset Z8000
7465 @include c-z8k.texi
7466 @end ifset
7467
7468 @ifset VAX
7469 @include c-vax.texi
7470 @end ifset
7471
7472 @ifset V850
7473 @include c-v850.texi
7474 @end ifset
7475
7476 @ifset XGATE
7477 @include c-xgate.texi
7478 @end ifset
7479
7480 @ifset XSTORMY16
7481 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7482 @end ifset
7483
7484 @ifset XTENSA
7485 @include c-xtensa.texi
7486 @end ifset
7487
7488 @ifset GENERIC
7489 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7490 @raisesections
7491 @end ifset
7492
7493 @node Reporting Bugs
7494 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7495 @cindex bugs in assembler
7496 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7497
7498 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7499
7500 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7501 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7502 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7503 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7504
7505 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7506 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7507
7508 @menu
7509 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7510 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7511 @end menu
7512
7513 @node Bug Criteria
7514 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7515 @cindex bug criteria
7516
7517 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7518
7519 @itemize @bullet
7520 @cindex fatal signal
7521 @cindex assembler crash
7522 @cindex crash of assembler
7523 @item
7524 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7525 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7526
7527 @cindex error on valid input
7528 @item
7529 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7530
7531 @cindex invalid input
7532 @item
7533 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7534 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7535 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7536
7537 @item
7538 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7539 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7540 @end itemize
7541
7542 @node Bug Reporting
7543 @section How to Report Bugs
7544 @cindex bug reports
7545 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7546
7547 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7548 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7549 contact that organization first.
7550
7551 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7552 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7553 distribution.
7554
7555 @ifset BUGURL
7556 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7557 to @value{BUGURL}.
7558 @end ifset
7559
7560 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7561 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7562 fact or leave it out, state it!
7563
7564 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7565 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7566 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7567 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7568 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7569 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7570 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7571 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7572 and the most helpful.
7573
7574 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7575 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7576 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7577
7578 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7579 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7580 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7581 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7582
7583 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7584
7585 @itemize @bullet
7586 @item
7587 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7588 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7589
7590 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7591 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7592
7593 @item
7594 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7595
7596 @item
7597 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7598 version number.
7599
7600 @item
7601 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7602 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7603
7604 @item
7605 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7606 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7607 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7608
7609 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7610 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7611
7612 @item
7613 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7614 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7615 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7616 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7617 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7618 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7619 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7620
7621 @item
7622 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7623 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7624
7625 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7626 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7627 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7628 make a mistake.
7629
7630 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7631 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7632 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7633 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7634 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7635 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7636 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7637 observations.
7638
7639 @item
7640 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7641 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7642 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7643 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7644 by line number.
7645
7646 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7647 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7648 @end itemize
7649
7650 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7651
7652 @itemize @bullet
7653 @item
7654 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7655
7656 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7657 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7658 changes will not affect it.
7659
7660 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7661 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7662 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7663 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7664
7665 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7666 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7667 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7668 less time, and so on.
7669
7670 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7671 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7672
7673 @item
7674 A patch for the bug.
7675
7676 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7677 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7678 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7679 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7680
7681 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7682 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7683 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7684 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7685
7686 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7687 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7688 help us to understand.
7689
7690 @item
7691 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7692
7693 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7694 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7695 @end itemize
7696
7697 @node Acknowledgements
7698 @chapter Acknowledgements
7699
7700 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7701 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7702 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7703 @c (October 2012),
7704 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7705
7706 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7707 more details?}
7708
7709 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7710 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7711 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7712
7713 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7714 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7715 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7716 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7717 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7718 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7719 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7720 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7721 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7722 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7723
7724 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7725 in format-specific I/O modules.
7726
7727 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7728 has done much work with it since.
7729
7730 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7731
7732 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7733
7734 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7735 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7736
7737 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7738 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7739 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7740 support a.out format.
7741
7742 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7743 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7744 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7745 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7746 targets.
7747
7748 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7749 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7750 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7751 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7752 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7753 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7754 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7755
7756 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7757 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7758 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7759 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7760
7761 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7762
7763 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7764
7765 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7766 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7767 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7768 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7769
7770 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7771 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7772 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7773 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7774 and some initial 64-bit support).
7775
7776 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7777
7778 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7779 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7780
7781 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7782 flavors.
7783
7784 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7785 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7786
7787 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7788 configuration enhancements.
7789
7790 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7791
7792 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7793 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7794 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7795 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7796
7797 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7798 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7799 @include fdl.texi
7800
7801 @node AS Index
7802 @unnumbered AS Index
7803
7804 @printindex cp
7805
7806 @bye
7807 @c Local Variables:
7808 @c fill-column: 79
7809 @c End:
This page took 0.185476 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.